How to Use S20 Tools

From TrainzOnline
(Difference between revisions)
Jump to: navigation, search
m
m (Effect Layers)
Line 1,736: Line 1,736:
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:'''</span><br>
 
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:'''</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=491>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Unlike '''Surveyor Classic''', there is no upper limit to the brush <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>. Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will '''decrease''' as the brush radius '''increases'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span> controls the starting angle for pasting the scrapbook objects. In '''Surveyor Classic''' you could only rotate and paste in 90&#176; increments. In '''S20''' you can rotate and paste at any angle.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span> options in the '''Scrapbook Filters''' control how the terrain heights in the '''Scrapbook''' are applied</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Setting extreme values for the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> and the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> when using the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Data Clone Brush&#160;</span> can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents into the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=10>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=495>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=495 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=491 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To "paint" with a '''Scrapbook''' asset:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Brush Tool''' from the '''Tools Palette''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;W&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Data&#160;</span> target from the '''Brush Tool''' first drop down menu</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select a brush action (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook&#160;Brush&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook&#160;Clone&#160;</span>) from the '''Brush Tool''' second drop down menu</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select a '''Scrapbook''' asset to be painted (see the '''The Scrapbook Palette''' below)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint5.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>open the '''Scrapbook Filter''' in the '''Scrapbook Palette''' and select the features to be pasted and their method of pasting (see '''The Scrapbook Filters''' below)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint6.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>set any '''Brush''' controls (e.g. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>) from the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint7.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> (depending on your brush settings) on the terrain to paint with the scrapbook asset</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;The Scrapbook Palette&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=600>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScrapbookToolsTop_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScrapbookPinnedIcon_S20.png|link=]][[image:ScrapbookUnPinnedIcon_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the pin icon to '''Lock''' (blue pin) and '''Unlock''' (white pin) the scrapbook. Locked scrapbooks are permanent (but can still be deleted). Unlocked scrapbooks will "expire" (self delete) after 5 days</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DeleteIcon_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the delete icon to delete the current scrapbook - most scrapbooks can be deleted (see '''Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks''' below on how to deal with the exceptions to this)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScrapbookThumbnail_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The thumbnail of the currently displayed scrapbook and the one that will be painted or pasted into the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScrapbookCounter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Identifies the currently displayed scrapbook (the first number) and the total number of stored scrapbooks (the second number)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScrapbookLeftRight_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;&lt;&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;&gt;&#160;</span> to move forwards or backwards through the stored scrapbooks to select the scrapbook that will be added to the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The scrapbook name can be edited. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> inside the name box to edit or replace the current name. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the image to make the name change permanent and pin (lock) the scrapbook (pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key does not work - a known bug)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks'''</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>Some scrapbooks are installed with '''Trainz''' and cannot be deleted. These scrapbooks have the label '''Prefab''' at the front of their names (you may have to scroll to the front of the name to see it). While they cannot be deleted they can be "disabled" so that they won't appear as an installed scrapbook. Unlocking them will not cause them to "expire" - after 5 days they will just become locked again.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To disable built-in scrapbooks</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open '''Content Manager''' and locate the "permanent" scrapbook or scrapbooks.<br>
 +
'''Search Tips:''' '''Name:''' starts with "'''Prefab'''"; '''Status:''' is '''Built-in'''; '''Type:''' is '''Misc'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Highlight (select) the Scrapbook assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Content''' menu and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Disable&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>You can reverse this and enable any or all of these scrapbooks later if you need them.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span id="Filters" style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;The Scrapbook Filters&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You will probably need to undock and resize the '''Scrapbook''' palette to make full use of its filters. See the Trainz Wiki page at [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How to Use S20 Palettes#Docking and Undocking Palettes|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]''' for undocking and resizing instructions</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">To Open the Scrapbook Filters:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''arrowhead''' next to the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Filters:&#160;</span> label below the scrapbook image to open the scrapbook filters.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>These filters control which elements in the scrapbook are added to the route and how they are added.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=600>[[image:ScrapbookToolsBottom_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can vary the appearance of the scrapbook when added to a route by painting or pasting it with different filter combinations. '''For Example:-'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;Ground Height:&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;None&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>ground height data will not be pasted and the ground heights already in the target area will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;Ground Texture:</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Overwrite&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>textures present in the scrapbook will replace those already in the target area</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;Meshes:</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Add&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>scenery objects in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;Splines:</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Add&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>scenery splines in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;Effect Layers:&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;None&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>effect layers in the scrapbook will not be pasted and any already in the target area will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can also add more variety when painting a '''Scrapbook''' by changing its '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span> settings in combination with different '''Filter''' selections (as shown above)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=400>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="center" colspan=3>
 +
<span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Painting/Pasting Options&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td bgcolor="yellow" colspan=3><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;What Data to Transfer&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=130><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>terrain height(s) used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Texture&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>textures used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Meshes&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>scenery objects (e.g. trees, buildings) used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>spline objects used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Effect Layers&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>effect layers ('''TurfFX''', '''Clutter''', '''Water Layer''') used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td bgcolor="yellow" colspan=3><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;How to Transfer the Data</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;None&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>do not paste/paint this feature</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Add&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>add this feature to those already present</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td ><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Overwrite&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>use this feature to replace those already present</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td bgcolor="lightyellow" colspan=3>For the '''Ground Height''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;None&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>do not paste/paint the scrapbook ground heights, use the existing ground heights instead</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Absolute&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>use the ground heights in the scrapbook to replace the existing ground heights</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Relative&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>use the '''difference''' between the existing ground heights and those used in the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>The current '''Scrapbook''' can be '''Pasted''' into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the '''Compass Rose''') by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;V&#160;</span></span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td> selecting <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span> from the '''Context Menu''' of a selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In both cases the '''Scrapbook''' will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a '''Marquee Selection Area''' that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current '''Scrapbook Palette''' filter settings
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Effect Layers"></span>
 +
The information in this Wiki Page applies to '''Surveyor 2.0 (S20)''' as found in '''Trainz Plus'''. The original reference material for this document can be found at [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[https://docs.trainzsimulator.com/v1/docs/surveyor20 Surveyor 2.0 Overview]'''
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629>&#160;</td> <!-- Filler Space -->
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Down -->
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Up -->
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepS20vS10|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
__TOC__
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=800>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Surveyor 2.0 <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Mouse&#160;</span> and <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Keyboard&#160;</span> Aids and Shortcuts</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Operations&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;LClick&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Left Click</span> on an object to '''<u>Select</u>''' it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;LClick&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Shift</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Left Click</span> on another object to add it to the '''<u>Selection</u>'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;LClick&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Drag&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Left Click and Drag</span> to '''<u>Move</u>''' an object or a group of selected objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;RClick&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Right Click</span> on the terrain to '''<u>Move</u>''' the '''Compass Rose''' and '''Focus''' to that location</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;DLClick&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Double Left Click</span> on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single '''<u>Selection</u>'''
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPointBlueSquare.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>when used on a '''consist''' all the wagons in the consist, regardless of type, will be selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPointBlueSquare.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>when used on a spline or track all the segments upto the next junction will be selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;DLClick&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Shift</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Double Left Click</span> on another object to add it and its nearby identical objects to those already in the '''<u>Selection</u>'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;LClick&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Drag&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Left Click and Drag</span> to '''<u>Clone</u>''' an object or selected objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;C&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + C</span> to '''<u>Copy</u>''' selected objects (including the ground height, ground textures and any effect layers) into a new '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;D&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + D</span> to '''<u>Unselect</u>''' a selected object (or '''ALL''' objects if multiple objects have been selected)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;E&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + E</span> to open the '''<u>Route Editor</u>''' (to edit the route name, description, thumbnail, scale, etc)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + F</span> to open the '''<u>Object Finder</u>'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F1&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + F1</span> to switch from '''<u>Driver</u>''' to '''<u>Surveyor</u>''' via the '''UDS''' inteface</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F2&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + F2</span> to switch from '''<u>Surveyor</u>''' to '''<u>Driver</u>''' via the '''UDS''' inteface</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;M&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + M</span> to open the '''<u>Mini Map</u>'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;R&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + R</span> to open the '''<u>Session Editor</u>''' (to edit the session name, description and rules)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + S</span> to '''<u>Save</u>''' the current route and/or session (which ever has been edited)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;V&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + V</span> to '''<u>Paste</u>''' the current '''Scrapbook''' into the route at the cursor position (the '''Surveyor Compass Rose'''). The current settings in the '''Scrapbook Palette''' Filter will control which objects are pasted and how they are pasted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;X&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + X</span> to '''<u>Cut</u>''' and remove selected objects from the route and place them into a new '''Scrapbook'''. The ground height, ground textures, effect layers and any objects in locked layers will be copied, not cut</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Y&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + Y</span> to '''<u>Redo</u>''' (reverse) the last <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Z&#160;</span></span> command</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Z&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + Z</span> to '''<u>Undo</u>''' previous actions</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Space&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ctrl + Space</span> to show/hide the '''<u>User Interface</u>''' (the Trainz Main Menu icons and all the docked palettes - undocked palettes will still be visible)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Alt</span> key and hover the tool pointer over an object to '''<u>Identify</u>''' it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;LClick&#160;</span></span></td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Alt</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Left Click</span> on an object to '''<u>Select</u>''' it in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Delete</span> key to '''<u>Delete</u>''' a selected object or objects from the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Tools&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=50><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;W&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Brush Tool</span> [[image:S20_BrushToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
<td rowspan=6 valign="middle">[[image:ToolsKeyboard_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;E&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Placement Tool</span> [[image:S20_PlacementToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;R&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Eyedropper Tool</span> [[image:S20_DropperToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Free Move Tool</span> [[image:S20_FreeMoveToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;D&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Fine Adjustment Tool</span> [[image:S20_FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Marquee Tool</span> [[image:S20_MarqueeToolIcon.png|link=|20px]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Context Menu</span> of a selected object</td>
 +
<td>[[image:ContextIconsOneRow_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Assets and Objects</span><br>
 +
----
 +
(from the '''[https://docs.trainzsimulator.com/v1/docs/surveyor20 Surveyor 2.0 Overview]''' document)<br>
 +
 +
In this online documentation, the term <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Asset</span> is used when talking about the items listed in '''Content Manager''' and the '''Asset Palette'''. Every asset has a '''KUID''' (unique identifier). When an asset (selected in the '''Assets Palette''') is placed into the world, the instance of the asset in the world is referred to as an <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Object</span>. There are multiple types of object, such as Scenery, Splines, Trains, Trackside, etc.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepS20vS10"></span>
 +
='''Surveyor 2.0 vs Surveyor Classic'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Down -->
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Up -->
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepTools|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 cellpadding=2 bgcolor="lightcyan">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Surveyor 2.0</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Surveyor 2.0''' (or '''S20''') is the new '''Surveyor''' interface provided to '''Trainz Plus Gold''' and '''Trainz Plus Standard''' subscribers as an alternative to '''Surveyor Classic'''. Classic is still available as an option in '''Trainz Plus'''. '''S20''' is also available in '''TRS22''' for '''Trainz Plus''' subscribers only. '''TRS22''' without the subscription will have '''Surveyor Classic'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Whats New</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a single set of common tools that can be applied to '''ALL''' types of objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the ability to select multiple objects of different types that can be manipulated as one with more freedom than was previously possible</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>each object has its own '''Context Menu''' that applies specific actions depending on the type of object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>information and controls in dockable and moveable '''Palettes''' that can be hidden when not needed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a new '''Scrapbook''' asset to store "scenes" that can be pasted anywhere in a route, between routes and shared through the '''DLS'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a new '''Marquee Tool''' that allows:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPointBlueSquare.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>multiple baseboards to be added, deleted and have their height, ground texture and grid resolution changed in a single operation</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPointBlueSquare.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>objects, ground heights, ground textures and effect layers to be moved and copied</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
The following screen images help illustrate the change in philosophy that has occurred with the release of the '''Surveyor 2.0''' user interface.
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="center" colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Surveyor Classic&#160;</span><br>
 +
'''2002 - 2022'''<br>
 +
[[image:Surveyor10Screen.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all the tools are in separate fixed Tabbed Flyouts with a different Flyout and set of tools for each type of object (scenery, track, terrain, textures, trains, etc)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the workflow forces you to select the correct tool for the type of object and then apply it to just a single object at a time
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="center" colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Surveyor 2.0&#160;</span><br>
 +
'''2022 - '''<br>
 +
[[image:Surveyor20Screen.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>there is just one set of tools that can be applied to all types of objects
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the workflow allows you to select multiple objects (that can be of different types) and then apply a selected tool or operation to them all
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepTools"></span>
 +
='''The Tools Palette'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Down -->
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Up -->
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepS20vS10|alt=Next Up|Next Up]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepBrush|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Tools Palette''' is at the core of the new interface and takes the place of all the '''Tool Flyouts''' that have been the standard for Trainz Surveyor for many years. Some of the tools are new while others have been given a makeover and new abilities.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=531>[[image:Tools_S20.png|link=|alt=Tools and keymap for S20]]<br>
 +
<br>
 +
The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Context Tool&#160;</span> is attached as an icon to a selected or newly placed object. The icon design will vary according to the type of object.</td>
 +
<td width=469>
 +
<span id="Notes_Palettes"></span>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=469 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=465 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=440><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes: Palettes'''</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
If the '''Tools Palette''' is not shown on the screen, then:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=175>[[image:WindowsMenu_S20.png|link=|alt=Windows Menu]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>open the '''Window Menu''' from the menu icons at the top of the screen</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>visible palettes have ticks next to their names</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletNoTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>invisible (hidden) palettes have no ticks next to their names</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>simply <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the name of a hidden palette or on the [[image:BulletNoTick.png|link=]] next to its name. This will add a [[image:BulletTick.png|link=]] and make the palette visible</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>make sure that the '''Tool Options Palette''' is also visible</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
There is a '''Trainz Wiki Page''' specifically covering the '''S20 Palettes''' at<br>[[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How_to_Use_S20_Palettes|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepBrush"></span>
 +
='''The Brush Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Ground Height]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td> <!-- for Skip Up -->
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepTools|alt=Next Up|Next Up]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepPlacement|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_BrushToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;W&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Brush Tool&#160;</span> "paints" the ground height, ground textures, effect layers and scrapbook scenes in the Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
The '''Brush Tool''' has two drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:BrushTools_S20.png|link=|alt=Brush Tools]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>The first drop down menu will set the '''"Brush Target"''' which is the type of brush. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the drop down box and on a '''Target''' to select it:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Height'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Texture'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scrapbook Data'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''&lt;''List of Effect Layers''&gt;'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Edit Effect Layers'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=100>[[image:BrushToolsGroundOptions_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=350>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=350 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=346 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If you have any '''Effect Layers''' then they will appear as '''Targets''' in this drop down list. Select an '''Effect Layer''' to use the brush to paint with that layer.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Ground Height"></span>
 +
=='''Ground Height'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Ground Texture]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepBrush]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>This Brush Target raises or lowers the '''Ground Surface Height''' by using a "painting" action</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This brush tool uses the '''Tool Options Palette'''. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
When the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span> '''Target''' is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of several brush actions that control how the height is adjusted.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The '''actions''' are:- </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Height Up'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Height Down'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Set Height'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Grade'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=200>[[image:BrushToolsHeightOptions_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ground Height Brush Actions:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=125><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Height Up&#160;</span><br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Height Down&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>raises/lowers the ground at a rate controlled by the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>"plateaus" the ground to the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting  at a rate controlled by the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>creates a smooth slope at the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Angle&#160;</span> settings at a rate controlled by the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The active height brush options for each action are shown in the '''Tool Options Palette''' with a <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span> coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.
 +
<br>
 +
Most of the data entry boxes in the '''Tool Options Palette''' have a '''Popup Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How to Use S20 Palettes#Tool Options Popups|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="center">
 +
<td width=210><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Height Up/Height Down&#160;</span><br>[[image:BrushToolsHeightUpDown_S20.png|link=|alt=Up/Down brush options]]</td>
 +
<td width=210><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set Height&#160;</span><br>[[image:BrushToolsHeightSet_S20.png|link=|alt=Height brush options]]</td>
 +
<td width=210><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span><br>[[image:BrushToolsHeightGrade_S20.png|link=|alt=Grade brush options]]</td>
 +
<td width=390><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=390 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=386 align="left">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=286>the brush radius (metres) - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=296>5m and above</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the brush height (metres) - see '''Tips:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=296>-3000m to +3000m</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the rate at which the '''Height''' changes</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=296>1% (very slowly) to 100% (very quickly)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>slope gradient - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=296>0% = flat ('''"Plateau"''' in '''Classic''') to</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>&#177;100% = steep (but '''not''' vertical)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Angle&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>grade direction (compass degrees)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=296>0&#176; (North) to &#177;359&#176;<br>
 +
a negative value reverses the grade direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=5>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]] You can copy the current '''Ground Height''' of any spot in the route to the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=300 bgcolor=#0000ff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Using the '''Eyedropper''' option found in any brush tool</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>move the mouse pointer onto the spot on the terrain</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=300 bgcolor=#0000ff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Using the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting and the '''compass'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> onto the spot on the terrain to move the '''Compass'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> inside the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting entry box</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the menu option<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get Height at Compass&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=300 bgcolor=#0000ff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Using the '''Compass''' and the '''Info Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> at the spot on the terrain to move the '''Compass'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>open the '''Focus''' controls in the '''Info Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> control '''down arrowhead''' icon</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the menu option<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Use&#160;Height&#160;for&#160;Brush&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=495>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=495 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=491 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=491>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=491>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Unlike '''Surveyor Classic''', there is no upper limit to the brush <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>. Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will '''decrease''' as the brush radius '''increases'''. If you are using the brush to set an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, to a specific height then the '''Marquee Tool''' would be a better choice.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> is defined as '''vertical rise''' divided by '''horizontal distance''' converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=10>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=495>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=495 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=491 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To set the '''Ground Surface Height''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Brush Tool''' from the '''Tools Palette''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;W&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the brush '''Target''' (in this case <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span>)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the brush '''Action''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Height Up&#160;</span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Height Down&#160;</span>, etc)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>set any brush controls (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>,<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>, etc) in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint5.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> on the terrain to change the terrain height</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ground Height Object Context Menu Options</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Once an object has been placed you can open its '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific '''Ground Height Options''', amongst others, will appear in the popup '''Context Menu''' of the object.
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the ground under the '''selected objects''' to match the set height of the objects. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object. This option is frequently used to raise and smooth the ground under track splines.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the '''selected objects''' to match the height of the ground beneath them ("drops them back to earth")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the '''selected objects''' to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Ground Texture"></span>
 +
=='''Ground Texture'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Scrapbook Data]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Ground Height]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>This tool paints the currently selected '''Ground Texture''' (from the '''Assets Palette''') on the ground</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This brush tool uses the '''Tool Options Palette''' and the '''Assets Palette'''. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
When the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Texture&#160;</span> '''Target''' is selected, the second drop down box will be disabled - there are no brush texture actions.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The active texture brush options are shown in the '''Tool Options Palette''' with a <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span> coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.
 +
<br>
 +
Most of the data entry boxes in the '''Tool Options Palette''' have a '''Popup Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How to Use S20 Palettes#Tool Options Popups|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=600>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td rowspan=2 width=200>[[image:BrushToolsTexture_S20.png|link=|alt=Texture brush options]]</td>
 +
<td width=400>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=306>the brush radius (metres) - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=396>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=306>5m and above</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>texture transparency</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=396>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=306>1% = almost transparent to</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=306>100% = solid (opaque)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>initial rotation angle - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=396>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=306>0&#176; to &#177;360&#176; (larger angles can be entered)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture pattern scaling factor as a %</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=396>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td>0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, &gt;100% larger than full size</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=400>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To paint a '''Ground Texture''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select your '''Ground Texture''' in the '''Assets Palette''' - you can use the '''Assets Palette''' filter options to narrow down the selection</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Brush Tool''' from the '''Tools Palette''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;W&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Texture&#160;</span> target from the '''Brush Tool''' drop down menu</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>set any brush controls (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span>) in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint5.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> on the terrain to paint with the texture</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting has no effect on textures as they are always painted on the existing ground surface.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can identify and select an existing '''Ground Texture''' to use elsewhere in the route by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and move the pointer onto the texture to be selected. Its name will appear in the pointer '''ToolTip'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>While holding down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the texture</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The texture will be selected in the '''Assets Palette''' and the '''Ground Texture''' target in the '''Brush Tool''' will be activated so you can immediately start painting with the texture using the current '''Tool Options Palette''' settings</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Unlike '''Surveyor Classic''', there is no upper limit to the brush <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>. Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will '''decrease''' as the brush radius '''increases'''. If you are using the brush to paint an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, then the '''Marquee Tool''' will be quicker but it will not give the options of changing the scale and rotation while painting the texture.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span> controls the starting angle for the texture when painting and is often used to avoid pattern repetition. As in '''Surveyor Classic''', holding down the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;[&#160;</span> or <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;]&#160;</span> keys while painting will continuously change the rotation angle<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#fcbcbc>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Stop.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Warning:''' Changing the rotation angle during painting is '''not''' recommended for '''PBR Textures''' as this will significantly increase the memory useage (each rotation will load in another copy of the PBR texture).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Ground Texture Object Context Menu Option</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Once an object has been placed you can open its '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific '''Ground Texture Option''', amongst others, will appear in the popup '''Context Menu''' of the object.
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out. This option is frequently used to paint a texture under '''selected''' track (or other) splines.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Default Baseboard Ground Texture"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Default Baseboard Ground Texture&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>When a new route is created or a new baseboard is added it will be covered with the ground texture for the selected '''Region''' or the default texture if no region has been set. This can be changed to a different texture (including to the standard '''TRS19/TRS22''' grid pattern).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=360>[[image:MainMenuSetGroundTexture.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The easiest option is to disable the current default ground texture<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>open the [[image:SurveyorDisplayIcon.png|link=]] '''Surveyor Display Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Grid&#160;</span> sub-option. This will use the current grid texture.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>A more complex solution is to edit an existing '''Region''' or create one of your own to add your preferred ground texture (such as the standard '''TRS22''' grid pattern) to each new route you create and every new baseboard that you add.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
The '''Baseboard Ground Texture''', chosen from the '''Surveyor Display Menu''' or by specifying a '''Region''', will become the default for every new route you create, until you change it to something else
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table cellpadding=2 bgcolor="Aquamarine">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LinkWiki.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
Information on creating and editing '''Region''' assets can be found on the '''Trainz Wiki''' at:-<br>
 +
:'''[[How_to_Create_a_Region_Asset|How to Create a Region Asset]]'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Scrapbook Data"></span>
 +
=='''Scrapbook Data'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Effect Layers]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Ground Texture]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>This tool paints the currently selected '''Scrapbook''' (from the '''Scrapbook Palette''') on the ground</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This brush tool uses both the '''Tool Options Palette''' and the '''Scrapbook Palette'''. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document. Instructions on how to create '''Scrapbooks''' can be found in the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Marquee_Tool|Marquee Tool]]''' section of this document.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>A new scrapbook can be created by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Marquee_Tool|Marquee Tool]]''' to select an area of the route containing objects, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Free_Move_Tool|Free Move Tool]]''' or the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Fine_Adjustment_Tool|Fine Adjustment Tool]]''' to select a group of individual objects for the scrapbook</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In both cases once the area or objects have been selected use the '''Context Menu''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span> options to place the objects into a new scrapbook.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=500 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=496 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Scrapbooks''', when created, will contain:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Heights'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Textures'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Effect Layers''' - if present</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Selected Objects''' - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: yellow;">&#160;But <u>NOT</u> Rolling Stock (Trains)&#160;</span>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=500 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=496 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
'''Scrapbooks''', when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Heights'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Textures'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Effect Layers'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scenery Objects (Meshes)''' - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scenery Splines''' - roads, track, fences, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>You have options in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Filters|The Scrapbook Filters]]''' that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>The current '''Scrapbook''' can be '''Pasted''' into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the '''Compass Rose''') by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;V&#160;</span></span>, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td> selecting <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span> from the '''Context Menu''' of a selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In both cases the '''Scrapbook''' will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a '''Marquee Selection Area''' that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current '''Scrapbook Palette''' filter settings
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;The Scrapbook Brush Actions&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
When the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Data&#160;</span> '''Target''' is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of two brush actions that control how the scrapbook is applied.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The '''actions''' are:- </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scrapbook Brush'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scrapbook Clone'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=200>[[image:BrushToolsScrapbookOptions_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=600>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=596 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Scrapbook Brush Actions:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Brush&#160;</span> will '''resize''' the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Clone&#160;</span>  will paint the scrapbook sized according to the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> setting. See '''Notes''' below
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Brush&#160;</span> will '''resize''' the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size.
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the brush is small then the scrapbook contents will be compressed closer together</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the brush is large then the contents will be spaced further apart</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Every <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> will paste another complete scrapbook copy</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette''' is ignored.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Clone&#160;</span> will paste the scrapbook sized according to the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> setting ('''100%''' = original size)
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the brush is the same size as the scaled scrapbook then a single exact copy will be pasted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the brush is smaller than the scaled scrapbook in size then only the central part of the scrapbook will be revealed and more will be added when the brush is moved around until the "painted" area covers the same area as the scaled scrapbook. Further painting will clone or tile the scrapbook contents</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the brush is larger than the scaled scrapbook in size then the contents will be cloned or tiled to fill the set brush radius</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#fcbcbc cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Stop.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">WARNING:</span><br>
 +
Take care if setting both the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span> and the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span>. Using extreme values for both, such as a very large brush radius and a very small scale value, can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The active scrapbook brush options are shown in the '''Tool Options Palette''' with a <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span> coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.
 +
<br>
 +
Most of the data entry boxes in the '''Tool Options Palette''' have a '''Popup Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How to Use S20 Palettes#Tool Options Popups|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="center">
 +
<td width=210><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Brush&#160;</span><br>[[image:BrushToolsScrapBrush_S20.png|link=|alt=Brush options]]</td>
 +
<td width=210><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scrapbook Clone&#160;</span><br>[[image:BrushToolsScrapClone_S20.png|link=|alt=Clone options]]</td>
 +
<td width=580><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=580 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=576 align="left">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=486>the brush radius (metres) - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=486>5m and above</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=486>if the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span> option has been enabled in the '''Scrapbook Palette''' filter settings, then this will set the rate or speed at which the ground height will change</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=486> 1% = slowest, 100% = fastest</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>initial rotation angle (degrees) - see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=486>0&#176; to &#177;360&#176; (larger angles can be entered)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Scale&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the scrapbook scaling factor</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td>0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, &gt;100% larger than full size</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Shape&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>brush shape</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Options:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=145>[[image:BrushToolsScrapShapes_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Circle&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Square&#160;</span> will set the brush to the selected shape with the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> setting the brush size</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Natural&#160;</span> will set the brush to the same shape as the '''Marquee''' that created the scrapbook, which may be rectangular. The <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> setting will scale the brush size</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td align="left">The '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting has no effect on the '''Scrapbook'''. This feature is controlled by the '''Scrapbook Palette Filter''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ground Height&#160;</span> options.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=495>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=495 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=491 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=491>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 
----
 
----
 
</td>
 
</td>
Line 2,175: Line 4,285:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:'''</span><br>
+
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 
----
 
----
 
</td>
 
</td>
Line 2,268: Line 4,378:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
<td width=306>see '''Notes:'' below</td>
+
<td width=306>see '''Notes:''' below</td>
 
</tr>
 
</tr>
 
</table>
 
</table>
Line 2,348: Line 4,458:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:'''</span><br>
+
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 
----
 
----
 
</td>
 
</td>
Line 2,638: Line 4,748:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:'''</span><br>
+
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 
----
 
----
 
</td>
 
</td>
Line 2,667: Line 4,777:
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<tr valign="top">
 
<td width=629><span id="skip Edit Effect Layers..."></span>
 
<td width=629><span id="skip Edit Effect Layers..."></span>
 +
=='''Edit Effect Layers...'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepPlacement]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Effect Layers]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
When this '''Target''' is selected, the '''Edit Effect Layer''' dialogue box will appear. This is the same as selecting <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit Effect Layers ...&#160;</span> from the [[image:SurveyorEditIcon.png|link=]] '''Surveyor Edit Menu'''.
 +
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:EditMenuSelectEffectLayers.png|link=|alt=Open effect layers]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span><br>
 +
[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] If no Effect Layers are present then you can create a new one<br>
 +
[[image:NewEffectLayerEntry.png|link=|alt=New effect layer]]</td>
 +
<td><br>
 +
[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] If Effect Layers are present then select one to edit<br>
 +
[[image:EditEffectLayersMenu.png|link=|alt=Edit effect layers]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Effect Layers''' are created for each route. You can select and edit a previously saved '''Effect Layer''' rather than having to recreate the entire effect each time.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table cellpadding=2 bgcolor="Aquamarine">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LinkWiki.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
More information on creating and editing '''Effect Layers''' can be found on the '''Trainz Wiki''' at:-<br>
 +
:'''[[TurfFX_Effect_Layer]]'''
 +
:'''[[Clutter_Effect_Layer]]'''
 +
:'''[[Water_Effect_Layer]]'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepPlacement"></span>
 +
='''The Placement Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Placing a Scenery Mesh Object]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Edit Effect Layers...]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepBrush|alt=Next Up|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepEyedropper|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_PlacementToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;E&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Placement Tool&#160;</span> adds objects to a Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This tool uses the '''Tool Options Palette''' and the '''Assets Palette'''. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easier to identify that the '''Placement Tool''' is active</td>
 +
<td>[[image:PlacementToolPointer_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
The '''Placement Tool''' has no drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:PlacementTools_S20.png|link=|alt=Placement Tools]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">More Placement Options</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>After an object has been placed in a route its position and/or height can be changed by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>using the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Free Move Tool|Free Move Tool]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>using the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Fine Adjustment Tool|Fine Adjustment Tool]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>editing its <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> settings in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>selecting the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply Height&#160;</span> option in its '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
The first step is to identify and select the particular object that you want to add to the route.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Placing a Scenery Mesh Object"></span>
 +
=='''Placing a Scenery Mesh Object'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Placing a Scenery or Track Spline]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepPlacement]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in '''Trainz''' terminology as <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Scenery Mesh Objects</span>.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To add a '''Scenery Mesh Object''' the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add. Steps [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]], [[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]] and [[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]] are common to placing '''ALL''' types of objects but the selection of the object in step [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] will change for different types of objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] In the '''Asset Palette''' choose one of the following:-
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=250 bgcolor=#0000ff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=246 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=246 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on an asset selection icon<br>
 +
[[image:FilterSelectIcons.png|link=|alt=Filter Icons]]
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:GroundTextureFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all ground textures</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:SceneryMeshFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all non-spline scenery assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:ScenerySplineFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all spline scenery assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:TrackSplineFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all track spline assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:TrackMeshFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:TrainFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all rolling stock assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top" align="left">
 +
<td>[[image:PresetFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all '''Effect Layer''' presets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=250 bgcolor=#0000ff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=246 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the '''Content Drop-down Box'''<br>
 +
[[image:FilterSelect.png|link=|alt=Filter List]]<br>
 +
Then select '''Scenery Objects'''<br>
 +
[[image:FilterSelectSceneryObject_S20.png|link=|alt=Scenery Objects]]
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Shortcut&#160;</span><br>
 +
If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1Blue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key. The object name will appear in a '''ToolTip''' attached to the pointer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2Blue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>while holding down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the object to identify it in the '''Assets Palette''' and automatically select it for placement with the '''Placement Tool'''. Release the key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Jump to '''Step'''&#160;[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]] below (for a '''Scenery Mesh Object''') or to '''Step'''&#160;[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]] in one of the sections below (for a different type of object).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Optional:''' To narrow down the filter list type part of the object name into the '''Search Text Box'''. For example if you have selected '''Scenery Objects''' and want to find "barns", then type "barn" ('''UPPER/lower''' case does not matter).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:FilterSelectSearchBarn_S20.png|link=|alt=Text search]]</td>
 +
<td>This will list all the '''Scenery Objects''' containing the text "barn" in their name or description.<br>
 +
<table width=800>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:FilterSelectWoodenBarn_S20.png|link=|alt=Filtered list]]</td>
 +
<td valign="middle">[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the required item in the list.<br><br>
 +
When selected the object will be highlighted on a blue background and its name will appear in the '''Assets Palette''' title bar.<br><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options: </span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on the name in the '''Asset List''' to bring up its image and description, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the '''Preview Palette''', <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>switch the asset list to '''Thumbnail View''' (best used when the palette is undocked and enlarged).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>See the '''Wiki Page''' at [[image:WikiLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[How_to_Use_S20_Palettes#Thumbnail View|How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes]]''' for more details</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffe0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>A <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on an object in the '''Assets Palette''' filter list will automatically activate the '''Placement Tool''' so the next <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> in the route will place that object in the route.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=500>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]] The final step is to place the selected object into the route.<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1Blue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>if the '''Placement Tool''' is not selected then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> it or press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;E&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2Blue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spot where you want to place the object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Placement Tool''' will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu Options</span><br>
 +
Once a scenery mesh object has been placed you can open its '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup '''Context Menu'''.
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the '''selected''' objects to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reset&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>resets the rotation angle of the '''selected''' objects to their default values</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Randomise&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>applies a random rotation angle to each '''selected''' object around its vertical axis</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Mesh Object Context Menu|Mesh Object Context Menu]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Moving Scenery Mesh Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Once an scenery mesh object has been added to a route its height can be changed with the '''Placement Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=50 align="right">[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Placement_Tool_Options|Placement Tool Options]]''' below.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>It can also be easily deleted.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=50 align="right">[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Deleting_Placed_Objects|Deleting Placed Objects]]''' below.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>But to move most placed objects ('''Track Objects''' and '''Rolling Stock Objects''' are exceptions - see below) you must switch to one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=50 align="right">[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Free_Move_Tool|The Free Move Tool]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="right">[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Fine_Adjustment_Tool|The Fine Ajustment Tool]]'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Placing a Scenery or Track Spline"></span>
 +
=='''Placing a Scenery or Track Spline'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Placing Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Placing a Scenery Mesh Object]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their '''endpoints'''. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=3><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> Start the process of laying a track or spline by identifying and selecting the track or scenery spline as described in steps [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]] in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Placing_a_Scenery_Mesh_Object|Placing a Scenery Mesh Object]]''' above but in '''Step''' [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] select the '''Scenery Spline''' or the '''Track''' filter in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=3><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=475 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=471 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=5>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' icons:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:ScenerySplineFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>spline scenery assets</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>[[image:TrackSplineFilter_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>track spline assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=475 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=471 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' drop down list:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scenery Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Track&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Then continue as shown below:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td rowspan=2 width=420>[[image:PlacementTrack1_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spot where the spline will start. This will place the start or first '''endpoint''' of the spline.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint5.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Move the mouse in the direction you want to lay the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:PlacementTrack2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint6.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the first spline segment, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> again. This will anchor the second spline endpoint. The spline between the two endpoints is the first spline segment.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
The spline segment will now have three '''Context Icons''', one for each '''endpoint''' and one for the spline segment.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=480 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=476 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Different context menu options are provided depending on which icon you <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td rowspan=2>[[image:PlacementTrack3_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint7.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the new endpoint and move the mouse in the direction you want to continue laying the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes: Curves for Trainz Geeks'''</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>Splines and track splines are created and stored using '''Bezier Curves''', a mathematical formula commonly used for curves in computer graphics. Each spline segment, curved or straight, is described using just 4 points regardless of its length and complexity. This gives significant savings in storage and processing. Unfortunately, real world curves are rarely described by simple '''Bezier Curves'''. This can sometimes create difficulties when modelling curves from the real world so approximations often have to be used in the '''Trainz World'''.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td rowspan=3>[[image:PlacementTrack4_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint8.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the second spline segment, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> again. This will anchor the third spline endpoint and the '''Context Icons''' will move to the new segment.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=480 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=476 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Adding a Junction and Editing</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To add a junction to a spline segment <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on it with the '''Placement Tool''' at the point where you want to insert the junction, including at an '''endpoint'''. Then move the mouse to draw out the new spline segment.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To edit a spline segment <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;DO NOT&#160;</span> click on it</span> with the '''Placement Tool''' as this will insert a junction. Select the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' and then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the segment to be edited.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Repeat '''Steps''' [[image:DotPoint7.JPG|link=]] and [[image:DotPoint8.JPG|link=]] above to continue laying the spline.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Spline Object Context Menu Options</span><br>
 +
Once a spline object has been placed you can open either of its two '''Context Menus''' - one for the spline segment and one for the endpoints (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on one of its icons or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup '''Context Menu''' (the exact menu will depend on whether a segment or an endpoint was selected).
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Straighten&#160;Spline&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be [[image:Tick.PNG|link=]] ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Separate&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the '''selected''' endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>removes the '''selected''' endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a '''selected''' endpoint with the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;  color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Insert&#160;Spline&#160;Point&#160;Here&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Spline Object Context Menu|Spline Object Context Menu]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Spline Heights&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the '''height''' of a segment or endpoint into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting and the gradient will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the spline segment or endpoint and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting box. Select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
When you start adding a spline to a route it will always be placed at the height of the terrain regardless of the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting.<br>
 +
 +
However, you can set the heights of any selected segment or endpoint.
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Placing Track Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Placing Track Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Placement Tool Options]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Placing a Scenery or Track Spline]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track Objects''' (e.g. signals, speed signs, switches, etc), both visible and invisible, can only be attached to track splines.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Visible''' examples of track objects include:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Signals, speed signs, end buffers, switches</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Invisible''' examples of track objects include:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Trackmarks, triggers, direction and priority markers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> Follow steps [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]] in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Placing_a_Scenery_Mesh_Object|Placing a Scenery Mesh Object]]''' above but in '''Step''' [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] select the '''Track Object''' filter in the '''Assets Palette'''.
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=275 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=271 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' icons:-<br>
 +
[[image:TrackMeshFilter_S20.png|link=]] track (non spline) assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=375 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=371 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' drop down list:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Track Objects&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Then continue as shown below:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>[[image:PlacementTrackObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the track at the position where you want the '''Track Object''' to be placed.<br><br>
 +
Once it has been placed it can be moved, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the '''Anchor Point''' (the small yellow dot in the middle of the track) to any position along the track or to another track.<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Moving '''Track Objects''' can also be performed, with more control and additional options, using the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Track Mesh Object Context Menu Options</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Once a track mesh object has been placed you can open its '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. One or both of the following specific options will appear, amongst others, in the popup '''Context Menu'''.
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Trackside&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>swaps the position of the object to the other side of the track so that it faces the opposite direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Junction&#160;Direction&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>if the object is a track switch or junction then its switch direction will be reversed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Track Object Context Menu|Track Object Context Menu]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Placing Rolling Stock Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Placing Rolling Stock Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Placement Tool Options]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Placing Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Rolling Stock Objects''' (e.g. locomotives, passenger cars and wagons) can only be attached to track splines.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> Follow steps [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]] [[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]] in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Placing_a_Scenery_Mesh_Object|Placing a Scenery Mesh Object]]''' above but in '''Step''' [[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] select the '''Rolling Stock''' filter in the '''Assets Palette'''.
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=275 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=271 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' icons:-<br>
 +
[[image:TrainFilter_S20.png|link=]] rolling stock assets</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50 align="center"><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#0000ff width=375 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=371 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Select from the '''Assets Palette''' drop down list:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rolling Stock&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Then continue as shown below:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>[[image:PlacementRollingStockObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the track at the position where you want the '''Rolling Stock Object''' to be placed.<br><br>
 +
Once it has been placed it can be moved, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the '''Anchor Point''' (the small yellow dot) to any position along the track or to another track. It can also be coupled to a consist and then decoupled by dragging the same '''Anchor Point'''. <br><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Moving, coupling and decoupling '''Rolling Stock Objects''' can also be performed, with more control, using the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Rolling Stock Object Context Menu Options</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Once a rolling stock object has been placed you can open its '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup '''Context Menu'''.
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Vehicle&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Free_Couple|Coupling Rolling Stock Objects]]''' for more details</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Rolling Stock Object Context Menu|Rolling Stock Object Context Menu]]''' for more details.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Placement Tool Options"></span>
 +
=='''Placement Tool Options'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Deleting Placed Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Placing Rolling Stock Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>These options do not apply to '''Rolling Stock Objects'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To use the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting with the '''Placement Tool''' a value must be entered followed by the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key '''OR''' select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply Height&#160;</span> option from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to use the current setting. This must be performed '''after''' the object has been been placed.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Placement Mesh Object Height Options&#160;</span>===
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the height of a '''selected''' scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:PlacementMeshHeight0_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=200>[[image:PlacementMeshHeight3_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
In '''Surveyor 2.0''' track objects as well as scenery mesh objects can be given a height - in the case of track objects the height is above (or below) the track.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=596 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' scenery or track mesh object, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting, enter a value followed by the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting, enter a value then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> and select <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>from the objects '''Context Menu''' select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option to apply an existing height setting, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>The object will be moved to the set height above (or below) the terrain. The vertical yellow line shown in the second image on the left indicates the height change. The small yellow dot at the base of the line is the terrain '''attachment point''' for the object.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Placement Spline (and Track) Options&#160;</span>===
 +
<br>
 +
Splines have two '''Placement Tool''' settings in the '''Tool Options Palette'''.
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:PlacementSplineTools_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>spline gradient (see '''Notes:''' below). The finishing '''endpoint''' of each spline segment will be set higher (for a '''positive''' grade) or lower (for a '''negative''' grade) than the starting '''endpoint'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=796>0% (flat) to &#177;100% (steep but '''not''' vertical)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on a track or spline segment to copy the '''Grade''' value at that point into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting. That value can then be used to set the '''Grade''' of other spline segments.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Condition&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this applies to '''Track Spline''' objects and sets the track '''condition''' (or "ride comfort") for each segment</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=90 align="right">'''Range:'''&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=796>1% (terrible track condition) to 100% (perfect track condition)<br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=692 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>The '''Track Condition''' can also be set for each track segment in its '''Context Menu''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=796 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the '''height''' of a segment or endpoint into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting and the gradient will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the spline segment or endpoint and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting box. Select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> is defined as '''vertical rise''' divided by '''horizontal distance''' converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical grade (such as up a cliff face) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key. This works even if the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> icon is not coloured <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span>. <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to apply an existing height value, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Deleting Placed Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Deleting Placed Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepEyedropper]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Placement Tool Options]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=420 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=416 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To delete objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>Select the object or a group of objects by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Free Move Tool''' (or press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span>) <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Fine Adjustment Tool''' (or press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;D&#160;</span>)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span> key when using these tools</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Then ..'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>Choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Context Menu''' of the object (or object group) and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> option
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=480>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=480 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=476 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can also use the '''Marquee Tool''' to select an area of the route to delete its objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>With these tools ('''Free Move''', '''Fine Adjustment''' and '''Marquee''') you can restrict the objects that can be selected and deleted by using filters in the '''Assets Palette'''. For more information see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Narrowing_the_Search|Narrowing the Search]]''' in the '''Eyedropper Tool''' section below</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepEyedropper"></span>
 +
='''The Eyedropper Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Quick Steps]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Deleting Placed Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepPlacement|alt=Next Up|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepFreeMove|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_DropperToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;R&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Eyedropper Tool&#160;</span> identifies and selects objects in a Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This tool uses the '''Assets Palette'''. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easy to identify that the '''Eyedropper Tool''' is active</td>
 +
<td>[[image:EyedropperToolPointer_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
The '''Eyedropper Tool''' has no drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>An '''Eyedropper''' is inside all the tools so you can quickly identify any object without having to switch to the '''Eyedropper Tool''' and back again.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and move the pointer tool onto an object to reveal its name as a '''ToolTip'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on an object to select it in the '''Assets Palette''' list</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the terrain to copy the '''Height''' value at that point into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting. That value can then be used to set the brush '''Height''' for other terrain areas</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on a track or spline segment to copy the '''Grade''' value at that point into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting. That value can then be used to set the '''Grade''' of other spline segments</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:EyedropperTools_S20.png|link=|alt=Eyedropper Tools]]</td>
 +
<td>When selected, the '''Eyedropper Tool''' will change the tool pointer to an "eyedropper" icon.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>move the '''eyedropper''' pointer over any object to reveal its name in a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;ToolTip&#160;</span> below the pointer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold the '''eyedropper''' over any object for a few seconds to reveal more information</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span>  on an object to select it in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Quick Steps"></span>
 +
=='''Quick Steps'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Narrowing the Search]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepEyedropper]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]] With the '''Eyedropper Tool''' selected, move the tool pointer (which will now be an eyedropper symbol) onto any object in view.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:EyedropperToolSelect2_S20.png|link=|alt=Eyedropper]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the object to identify it (highlighted in '''grey''') in the '''Assets Palette''' filter list''' [[image:AssetFilterNameHighlighted_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:EyedropperToolAssetSelected_S20.png|link=|alt=Asset filter set by the Eyedropper in S20]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the object name in the '''Assets Palette''' filter list to select it (highlighted in blue) and switch control to the '''Placement Tool''' so the next <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> in the route will place the selected object in the route.<br>
 +
[[image:AssetFilterNameSelected_S20.png|link=]]
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Narrowing the Search"></span>
 +
=='''Narrowing the Search'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepFreeMove]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Quick Steps]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Sometimes (or often) a scene will be too crowded with different scenery objects to be able to use the '''Eyedropper Tool''' to easily select a single object. In these cases additional options are available to help "remove the clutter".</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>These filter options can be used with the '''Placement Tool''', '''Free Move Tool''', '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' and the '''Marquee Tool''' as well as with the '''Eyedropper Tool'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
At the top of the '''Assets Palette''' is a drop down box which controls how the '''Tool''' works with the filters that you set.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=550>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:AssetsPalette_S20.png|link=|alt=Assets palette]]</td>
 +
<td width=350>The drop down box will provide three options:-<br>
 +
<table width=350>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150>
 +
<table width=150>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Filter List'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Filter Selection'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BulletTick.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Filter Visibility'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=200>[[image:AssetsPaletteFilterOptions_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
These options work with the '''Asset Filters''' to help narrow the search for a specific object or type of object that is in the route.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">Asset Filter Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=120><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Filter List&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this option will have no effect on the operation of the '''Tool''' or on the objects displayed on the screen. It is the default setting and any selections made with the '''Tool''' will be shown in the '''Assets Palette''' as described in the section '''Quick Steps''' above.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=120><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Filter Selection&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this option will restrict the '''Tool''' to only working on those objects that are in the filtered list. Objects that are not in the filtered list cannot be selected.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=120><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Filter Visibility&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this option will '''hide''' all objects that are not in the filtered list. The only exceptions are '''Ground Textures''' and '''Effect Layers''' which will be visible but, unless they are also in the filtered list, cannot be selected.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
As an example the following images show the progressive application of a '''Visibility Filter'''.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:AssetFilterScene1_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:AssestFilteredScene1.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint1Blue.png|link=]] No filter has been applied.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
All the objects are visible on the Surveyor screen.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
'''ALL''' objects can be selected.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:AssetFilterScene2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:AssestFilteredScene2.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
[[image:DotPoint2Blue.png|link=]] The '''Visibility Filter''' option has been applied and the filtered list has been set to display only '''Scenery Splines'''.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
All objects except '''Scenery Splines''', '''Ground Textures''' and '''Effect Layers''' are now hidden.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
Now only '''Scenery Splines''' can be selected.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:AssetFilterScene3_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:AssestFilteredScene3.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
[[image:DotPoint3Blue.png|link=]] An additional filter has been applied. The word "fence" has been added to the search text box.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
All '''Scenery Splines''' that do not have the text "fence" in their names or descriptions have now been hidden.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
Now only the remaining visible '''Scenery Splines''' can be selected.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepFreeMove"></span>
 +
='''The Free Move Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Narrowing the Search]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepEyedropper|alt=Next Up|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepFineAdjustment|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_FreeMoveToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;S&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Free Move Tool&#160;</span> moves objects around a Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This tool uses the '''Tool Options Palette'''. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
The '''Free Move Tool''' has no drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:FreeMoveTools_S20.png|link=|alt=Free Move Tools]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Free Move Alternatives</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In addition to the '''Free Move Tool''' the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>using the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Fine Adjustment Tool|Fine Adjustment Tool]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>editing its <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> values in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>selecting the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply Height&#160;</span> option in its '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Free Move: Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepFreeMove]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in '''Trainz''' terminology as <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Scenery Mesh Objects</span>.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Move a Mesh Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=250>[[image:FreeMoveToolCar_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=650>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move a '''Scenery Mesh Object''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Free Move Tool''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object in any '''horizontal''' direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When moving a scenery object, its height will be '''fixed''' to the terrain height.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the height of a '''selected''' scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key. This works even if the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> icon is not coloured <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span>. <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to apply an existing height value, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Mesh Object Context Menu"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Mesh Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key. The icon design will vary between object types.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuMeshObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=780>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>copy the selected object or objects and place them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Object&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the '''selected''' object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If no object has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the '''selected''' objects to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reset&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>resets the rotation angle of the '''selected''' objects to their default values</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Randomise&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>applies a random rotation angle to each '''selected''' object around its vertical axis</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Free Move: Track Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Free Move: Track Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track Objects''' (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>In '''Surveyor 2.0''' they can be moved left, right, above and below the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Move a Track Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track objects''' can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveTrackObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Step:</span> To move a track object horizontally:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object anywhere in the horizontal plane including away from the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH_S20.png|link=]]
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td colspan=2>Situations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>placing '''Track Marks''' and '''Triggers''' above (see the next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally. <br>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Set the Height of a Track Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track objects''' can be raised above and lowered below the track level.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the height of a '''selected''' track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
'''Throw Lever''' track object level with the track</td>
 +
<td rowspan=2 width=600>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=596 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' track object, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key. This works even if the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> icon is not coloured <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span>. <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to apply an existing height value, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveHV_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
After being moved vertically</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>A situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<span id="Track Object Context Menu"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Track Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>To open a selected track objects '''Context menu'''choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the '''Context Icon''' [[image:ContextIconsTrackObjects_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuTrackObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the selected object or objects and move them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>copy the selected object or objects and place them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Object&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the '''selected''' object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If the asset selected in the '''Assets Palette''' is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach&#160;to&#160;Track&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Trackside&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Junction&#160;Direction&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their '''Context Menu''' and choosing one of the following:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach to Track&#160;</span> to cancel the both the height and position changes, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle on Ground&#160;</span> to cancel the height change only</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveTrackObjectReversed_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To rotate a track object:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the track objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate Trackside&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)"></span>
 +
=='''Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Free Move: Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their '''endpoints'''. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Moving a spline can involve moving one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>an endpoint, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a segment, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>multiple segments including the whole length of the spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Move Spline Endpoints&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=450>[[image:FreeMoveToolSpline_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=450>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=450 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=446 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move an individual spline endpoint:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Free Move Tool''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the selected spline endpoint in any '''horizontal''' direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Active (selected) endpoints are shown as '''green'''. Inactive spline endpoints are shown as '''black'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=450 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=446 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The spline endpoint will be '''fixed''' at its original height.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Move Spline Segments&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
Splines are frequently made of multiple segments joined together. You can easily move a spline by moving its segments, individually or as a group.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=10000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveSplineSegments_S20.png|link=|alt=spline made of 3 joined segments]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Not all splines have endpoints at each ends. As shown in the image on the left, some splines will have an "endcap" that is attached to the start of the first segment and to the end of the last segment. The use of an endcap is a purely cosmetic effect - to give the spline a more distinctive appearance.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelected_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=600>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move an individual segment or multiple segments:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Free Move Tool''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;S&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment to be moved - click anywhere between the two spline endpoints on the segment<br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the selected segment will be highlighted in '''green/yellow'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The segment will have a temporary endpoint inserted at the location you clicked.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>Temporary spline endpoints can be made permanent by selecting the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Insert&#160;Spline&#160;Point&#160;Here&#160;</span> option from the segment '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelected_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=600>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''IF''' you are going to select and move more than one spline segment, then:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span> key down and individually <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> between the endpoints on each additional segment.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
The '''last''' segment that you <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> will have the temporary endpoint and '''Context Icons''' added.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>To select '''ALL''' the segments in a spline, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on a segment<br>
 +
If the spline contains a junction then this will only select all the segments upto the junction point<br>
 +
<br>
 +
The segment that you double-clicked will have the temporary endpoint and '''Context Icons''' added.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the selected segment(s) in any horizontal direction.<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If you had selected:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>only a single spline segment then only that segment will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will have their shapes (but not their endpoints) adjusted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>multiple spline segments then those segments will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will also have their shapes adjusted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the entire spline then '''ALL''' the segments and endpoints will be moved</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelectedMoved_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelectedMoved_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Set Spline Height&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the '''height''' of a segment or endpoint into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting and the gradient will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>firstly select the spline segment or endpoint and then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting box. Select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key. This works even if the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> icon is not coloured <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span>. <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to apply an existing height value, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Spline Object Context Menu"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Spline Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=420>[[image:ContextIconsSpline_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=480 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=476 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Splines have two different '''Context Icons''' that lead to two slightly different '''Context Menus'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>one context icon and menu for each '''endpoint'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>one context icon and menu for the '''segment'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>To open a selected objects '''Context menu''' choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the '''Context Icon''' [[image:SplineContextIcons_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:SplineEndPointContextIcon_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Endpoint Context Menu&#160;</span><br>
 +
[[image:ContextMenuSplineObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=240>[[image:SplineSegmentContextIcon_S20.png|link=]][[image:TrackSegmentContextIcon_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Segment Context Menu&#160;</span><br>
 +
[[image:ContextMenuSplineSegment_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the segment or segments and move them into the '''Scrapbook''' (not available for '''Endpoints''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the segment or segments and move them into the '''Scrapbook''' (not available for '''Endpoints''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Spline&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If the asset selected in the '''Assets Palette''' is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;this&#160;Spline&#160;Endpoint&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected '''<u>endpoint</u>''' to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected '''<u>segment</u>''' or '''<u>segments</u>''' to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Grade&#160;to&#160;this&#160;Spline&#160;Endpoint&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the endpoint to give a '''Grade''' to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can copy the '''Grade''' from an existing spline segment into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting of the '''Tool Options Palette'''.<br>
 +
[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]] hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment to copy its '''Grade''' value. That value can then be used to set the '''Grade''' of other spline segments</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Straighten&#160;Spline&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be [[image:Tick.PNG|link=]] ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Separate&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the '''selected''' endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>removes the '''selected''' endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a '''selected''' endpoint with the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;  color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Insert&#160;Spline&#160;Point&#160;Here&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepFineAdjustment]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Rolling Stock Objects''' (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Move Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
Use the '''Free Move''' tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>To move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
<table wifth=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStock_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=520 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=516 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">X</span> rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".<br>
 +
This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.<br>
 +
[[image:PlacementRollingStockCollision_S20.png|360px|link=]]<br>
 +
The simple solution is to use the '''Free Move Tool''' to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>All decoupling operations between '''Rolling Stock Objects''' are performed using just a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: blue;">Left Click and Drag</span>.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>To decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons), <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5_S20.png|link=]]<br><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A_S20.png|link=]]
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=520 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=516 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select one (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span>) or more (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span>) rolling stock objects inside a consist<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If more than one object is selected, then they:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>do not have to be connected to each other</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object or objects out of the consist and onto an <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; text-decoration: underline;">Unoccupied</span> section of track<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; background-color: yellow;">do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not.</span> Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The rotating yellow <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">X</span> floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Free_Couple"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Couple Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>All coupling operations between '''Rolling Stock Objects''' can be performed using just a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: blue;">Left Click and Drag</span> or through the objects '''Context Menu'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span><br><br>
 +
[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Using "Click and Drag"</span><br>
 +
<br>
 +
Consider the following simple situation:-
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1_S20.png|link=]]<br><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=520 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=516 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To '''Couple''' rolling stock objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span>) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If more than one object has to be selected then use a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> to individually select each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If '''ALL''' the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on any object in the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Using the Context Menu</span><br>
 +
 +
Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.
 +
 +
<span id="Free_Move_Merge"></span>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=480 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=476 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span>, on both objects<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>'''The order of selection <span style="font-size: 15px;">IS</span> important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
The '''Context Icon''' will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Rolling Stock Object Context Menu''' by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span><br>
 +
[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''Context Icon''' of the last selected rolling stock object, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span><br>
 +
[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
There are '''two''' possible outcomes depending on which object has the '''Context Icon'''
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:DotPoint1Blue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon</span><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Using the '''Merge into a Single Train''' option with the '''Context Icon''' on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:DotPoint2Blue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Context Icon on the Guard Van</span><br>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Using the '''Merge into a Single Train''' option with the '''Context Icon''' on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the '''Context Icon'''. The '''Context Menu''' is opened and the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span> is selected with the result as shown below.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Rolling Stock Object Context Menu"></span>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Free Move: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected rolling stock  object, or a group of selected rolling stock  objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=396>To open a selected rolling stock object's '''Context menu''' choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=371><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> its '''Context Icon''' [[image:ContextIconsRollingStock_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuRollingStock_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=780>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
Unlike other '''Context Menus''', the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span> menu options are not selectable for '''Rolling Stock Objects''' because these objects cannot be added to a '''Scrapbook'''. The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span> option performs some of the '''Scrapbook''' functions for rolling stock.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach to Track&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Vehicle&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Free_Couple|Coupling Rolling Stock Objects]]''' for more details</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected rolling stock object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected rolling stock object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepFineAdjustment"></span>
 +
='''The Fine Adjustment Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepFreeMove|alt=Next Up|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepMarquee|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;D&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Fine Adjustment Tool&#160;</span> makes 3D adjustments (position and rotations) to objects in a Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=900 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>This tool uses the '''Tool Options Palette'''. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
The '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' has no drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:FineAdjustmentTools_S20.png|link=|alt=Fine Adjustment Tools]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=700>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Fine Adjustment Alternatives</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In addition to the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>using the [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Free Move Tool|Free Move Tool]]'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>editing its <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;r&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;p&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> values in [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>selecting the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply Height&#160;</span> option in its '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The most obvious feature of the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' is the '''3D Anchor Frame''' it adds to a selected object. The frame is made of 3 straight and 3 curved coloured lines, called <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Anchors</span>, which control the position and orientation of an object or a group of objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=250>[[image:FineAdjust3DFrame_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=750>The '''Anchor''' controls are:-
 +
<table width=750>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;The Horizontal and Vertical Anchors&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>move the object (forward/back or up/down) in the direction of the '''Anchor''' line</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=750>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;The Rotational Anchors&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=350>rotate the object (clockwise and anti-clockwise) along the '''Anchor Arc Line''' centred around the '''Anchor Straight Line''' of the same colour</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=250 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=246 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Not all objects will have <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> and/or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> rotational Anchors.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=750>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;The Object Anchor&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: black;">&#160;&#160;&#160;&#160;</span> (black central dot) moves the object in any horizontal direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=400 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
The orientation of the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> horizontal anchor lines is based on the orientation of the object when it is placed in the scene, not on the compass directions</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To use the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' controls:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>move the tool pointer onto an Anchor - its colour will change to yellow for Anchor lines or green for the Object Anchor</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the '''Object Anchor''' in any direction or move the pointer along the chosen '''Anchor Line''' in the required direction (e.g. up on the blue vertical Anchor or clockwise around the arc of the red rotational Anchor)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td colspan=2>To achieve finer and more accurate control when moving anchors, choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>zoom in closer to the anchor point, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> fine adjustment arrows in the '''Info Palette''' object <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Pos:&#160;</span> controls. These arrows can be used to set the height and position to '''cm''' accuracy (see&#160;[[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]'''&#160;below), <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;r&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;p&#160;</span> <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> fine adjustment arrows in the '''Info Palette''' object <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rot:&#160;</span> controls. These arrows can be used to set the rotation to '''1&#176;''' accuracy (see&#160;[[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]'''&#160;below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepFineAdjustment]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in '''Trainz''' terminology as <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Scenery Mesh Objects</span>.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Move a Mesh Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>To move an object with the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> anywhere on the selected object (except on an '''Anchor''' line) to move it freely in any horizontal direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> on an Anchor line to move or rotate it in the direction of the line or arc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>These operations can also be performed on a group of selected objects. The 3D Anchor Frame will be on the last object added to the group.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=250 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor movement<br>[[image:FineAdjustZMove_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=250 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> Anchor rotation<br>[[image:FineAdjustYawMove_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=250 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> Anchor rotation<br>[[image:FineAdjustPitchMove_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=20>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=250 align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Anchor rotation<br>[[image:FineAdjustRotateXYMove_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Not all objects will have <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> '''Rotational Anchors'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Objects can be restored to their original height and rotation settings by opening their '''Context Menu''' and choosing one of the following:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reset Object Rotation&#160;</span> to cancel the rotation changes, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle on Ground&#160;</span> to cancel the height change</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Randomise Object Rotation&#160;</span> option in the '''Context Menu''' only affects rotations around the vertical axis - the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> '''Rotational Anchor'''.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scenery Mesh objects''' can be raised above and lowered below the ground level.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the height of a '''selected''' scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up/Down''' on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical '''Anchor''' line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key. This works even if the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> icon is not coloured <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Gold&#160;</span>. <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) to apply an existing height value, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Eblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Mesh Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key. The icon design will vary between object types.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuMeshObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=780>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the selected object or objects and move them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>copy the selected object or objects and place them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Object&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the '''selected''' object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If no object has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reset&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>resets the rotation angle of the objects to their default values</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Randomise&#160;Object&#160;Rotation&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>applies a random <span style="font-weight: 700;"><span style="font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Rotation Anchor</span> angle to each object around its vertical axis</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Fine Adjustment: Track Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Fine Adjustment: Track Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track Objects''' (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>In '''Surveyor 2.0''' they can be moved left, right, above and below the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Move a Track Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track objects''' can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FineAdjustTrackObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>To move a track object horizontally, choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>For movements '''along the track''' - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span>:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>anywhere within the object (except on an '''Anchor Line''' or '''Anchor Point'''), <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> horizontal '''Anchor''' line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line and track only)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>For movements '''left or right''' of the track - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span><br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> horizontal '''Anchor''' line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line only), <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>on the '''Object Anchor''' (the '''black dot''') to get unrestricted horizontal movement</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>For most track objects the '''Rotational Anchors''' have no effect</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td colspan=2>Situations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>placing '''Track Marks''' and '''Triggers''' above (see next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Track Object&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Track objects''' can be raised above and lowered below the track level.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the height of a '''selected''' track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
'''Throw Lever''' track object level with track<br>
 +
[[image:FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveHV_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
After being moved vertically</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' track object, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up/Down''' on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical '''Anchor''' line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting, enter a value followed by the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting, enter a value then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> and select <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>from the objects '''Context Menu''' select the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option to apply an existing height setting, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Eblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=596 bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>A situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=600 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>For most track objects the '''Rotational Anchors''' have no effect</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Track Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=396>To open a selected track objects '''Context menu''' choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=371><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the '''Context Icon''' [[image:ContextIconsTrackObjects_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuTrackObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the selected object or objects and move them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>copy the selected object or objects and place them into the '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Object&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the '''selected''' object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If the asset selected in the '''Assets Palette''' is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the objects to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach&#160;to&#160;Track&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Trackside&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Junction&#160;Direction&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their '''Context Menu''' and choosing one of the following:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach to Track&#160;</span> to cancel the both the height and position changes, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle on Ground&#160;</span> to cancel the height change only</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FineAdjustTrackObjectReversed_S20.png|400px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To rotate a track object:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the track objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the icon or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate Trackside&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)"></span>
 +
=='''Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Track Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their '''endpoints'''. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>To move a spline, choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>moving an endpoint, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>moving a segment, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>moving multiple segments including the whole length of the spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Endpoints&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=280>[[image:FineAdjustSplineEndPoint_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=620>
 +
The '''3D Anchor Frame''' shown is for a spline '''endpoint'''.<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move an individual spline endpoint:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on, the spline endpoint to be moved.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Note:''' only the horizontal <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> and the vertical <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> lines can be selected.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> one of the following:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>an '''Anchor''' to move the endpoint in that specific direction, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the endpoint itself to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Segments&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> rotational Anchor '''CANNOT''' be used on '''Track splines'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=280>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegment_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=620>The '''3D Anchor Frame''' shown is for a spline '''segment'''.<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move spline segments:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on, the spline segment to be moved.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>an '''Anchor''' to move the endpoint in that specific direction, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>anywhere in a segment to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To select:-
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>more than one segment - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> on each segment</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''ALL''' the segments - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on a segment. This will select segments in '''both''' directions from the segment clicked. If the spline contains a junction then this will only select the segments upto the junction point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=320>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegmentStraight_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Selecting a spline segment with the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' will add a '''Temporary Endpoint''' at the point where the segment was clicked.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
This will produce 3 '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' control frames, one at each end of the segment and one at the click point, as shown in the image on the left. The whole segment can be moved, as shown in the following images, by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> anywhere within the segment.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=320>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegmentXYMove_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Segment moved to the right along the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> horizontal Anchor line</td>
 +
<td width=320>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegmentZMove_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Segment moved up along the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor line</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span></span> straight anchor lines will move the whole segment along the direction of the line
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=320>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegmentRotate_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Segment rotated anti-clockwise around the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> rotational Anchor arc line</td>
 +
<td width=320>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSegmentPitch_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Segment rotated clockwise around the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> rotational Anchor arc line</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span></span> curved anchor lines will rotate the whole segment around the axis of the same colour
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> line height change and a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> Anchor rotation can be cancelled at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle on Ground&#160;</span> option from the segments '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Anchor rotation can be straightened at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Straighten Spline&#160;</span> option from the segments '''Context Menu''' but this will not return the '''endpoints''' to their original positions
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Set Spline Height&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can copy the '''height''' of a segment or endpoint into the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting and the gradient will be copied into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the spline segment or endpoint and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting box. Select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Get&#160;Height&#160;from&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>To set the '''height''' of a '''selected''' spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Options:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up/Down''' on the objects <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical '''Anchor''' line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value) and press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Cblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>enter a new value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting (or keep the existing value), then <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> in the setting box and select the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;Selection&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Dblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>from the objects '''Context Menu''' (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the objects '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key) the <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span> option, <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Eblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the '''Info Palette''' enter a value in the objects <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> (height) setting or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> '''Up''' or '''Down''' on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Spline Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=420>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=396>To open a selected objects '''Context menu''' choose one of the following:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=371><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the '''Context Icon''' [[image:SplineContextIcons_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=580 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=576 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Splines have two different '''Context Icons''' that lead to two slightly different '''Context Menus'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>one context icon and menu for each '''endpoint'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>one context icon and menu for the '''segment'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:SplineEndPointContextIcon_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Endpoint Context Menu&#160;</span><br>
 +
[[image:ContextMenuSplineObject_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=240>[[image:SplineSegmentContextIcon_S20.png|link=]][[image:TrackSegmentContextIcon_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Segment Context Menu&#160;</span><br>
 +
[[image:ContextMenuSplineSegment_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the segment or segments and move them into the '''Scrapbook''' (not available for '''Endpoints''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>remove the segment or segments and move them into the '''Scrapbook''' (not available for '''Endpoints''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>paste the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Replace&#160;Spline&#160;with&#160;Selected&#160;Asset&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the '''Assets Palette'''. If the asset selected in the '''Assets Palette''' is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle&#160;on&#160;Ground&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;this&#160;Spline&#160;Endpoint&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected '''<u>endpoint</u>''' to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the selected '''<u>segment</u>''' or '''<u>segments</u>''' to the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Grade&#160;to&#160;this&#160;Spline&#160;Endpoint&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>sets the height of the endpoint to give a '''Grade''' to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can copy the '''Grade''' from an existing spline segment into the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Grade&#160;</span> setting of the '''Tool Options Palette'''.<br>
 +
[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]] hold down the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Alt&#160;</span> key and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the spline segment to copy its '''Grade''' value. That value can then be used to set the '''Grade''' of other spline segments</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Straighten&#160;Spline&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be [[image:Tick.PNG|link=]] ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Separate&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the '''selected''' endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;Splines&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>removes the selected endpoint and merges the segments on both sides into one. Two segments can also be joined by selecting and deleting the endpoint with the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;  color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Insert&#160;Spline&#160;Point&#160;Here&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Rolling Stock Objects''' (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Move Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
Use the '''Fine Adjustment''' tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>To move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FineAdjustRollingStock_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=520>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link-]]</td>
 +
<td>Despite their presence in the '''Fine Adjustment Tool 3D Anchor Frame''' the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> <span style=" color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Rotational Anchor lines</span> and the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Vertical Anchor Line</span> will '''NOT''' work on '''Rolling Stock Objects'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link-]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Object Anchor</span> (the central dot) will move the selected rolling stock object or objects in any horizontal direction but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link-]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> Horizontal Anchor Line</span> will move the selected rolling stock object or objects along the track</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link-]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> Horizontal Anchor Line</span> will move the selected rolling stock object or objects horizontally off the track but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">X</span> rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".<br><br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=360>[[image:PlacementRollingStockCollision_S20.png|360px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
The simple solution is to use the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>All decoupling operations between '''Rolling Stock Objects''' are performed using just a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: blue;">Left Click and Drag</span>.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>To decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons), <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5_S20.png|link=]]<br><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A_S20.png|link=]]
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=520 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=516 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select one (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span>) or more (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span>) rolling stock objects inside a consist<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>If more than one object is selected, then they:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>do not have to be connected to each other</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object or objects out of the consist and onto an <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; text-decoration: underline;">Unoccupied</span> section of track<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; background-color: yellow;">do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not.</span> Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The rotating yellow <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">X</span> floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span id="Fine_Couple"></span>
 +
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Couple Rolling Stock Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>All coupling operations between '''Rolling Stock Objects''' can be performed using just a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: blue;">Left Click and Drag</span> or through the objects '''Context Menu'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span><br><br>
 +
[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Using "Click and Drag"</span><br>
 +
<br>
 +
Consider the following simple situation:-
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1_S20.png|link=]]<br><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=520 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=516 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To '''Couple''' rolling stock objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span>) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If more than one object has to be selected then use a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> to individually select each object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If '''ALL''' the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on any object in the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Using the Context Menu</span><br>
 +
 +
Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.
 +
 +
<span id="Free_Move_Merge"></span>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=480 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=476 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span>, on both objects<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>'''The order of selection <span style="font-size: 15px;">IS</span> important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
The '''Context Icon''' will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Rolling Stock Object Context Menu''' by choosing one of the following:-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span><br>
 +
[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''Context Icon''' of the last selected rolling stock object, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span><br>
 +
[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
There are '''two''' possible outcomes depending on which object has the '''Context Icon'''
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:DotPoint1Blue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon</span><br>
 +
[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Using the '''Merge into a Single Train''' option with the '''Context Icon''' on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=480>[[image:DotPoint2Blue.png|link=]] <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Context Icon on the Guard Van</span><br>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
Using the '''Merge into a Single Train''' option with the '''Context Icon''' on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the '''Context Icon'''. The '''Context Menu''' is opened and the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span> is selected with the result as shown below.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>[[image:FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a '''Context Icon''' that opens a '''Context Menu'''. The icon design will vary between object types.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td width=396>To open a selected rolling stock objects '''Context menu''' choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=376><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> its '''Context Icon''' [[image:ContextIconsRollingStock_S20.png|link=]] <span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Press the <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;T&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=220>[[image:ContextMenuRollingStock_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=780>
 +
<table width=780 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=776 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
Unlike other '''Context Menus''', the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span> menu options are not selectable for '''Rolling Stock Objects''' because these objects cannot be added to a '''Scrapbook'''. The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span> option performs some of the '''Scrapbook''' functions for rolling stock.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paint&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the texture selected in the '''Assets Palette''' will be painted under the '''selected''' objects. The '''Tool Options Palette''' brush settings (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Radius&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Sensitivity&#160;</span>) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the '''Assets Palette''' then this option will be greyed out.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Smooth&#160;Ground&#160;Under&#160;Selected&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Reattach to Track&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Vehicle&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Change&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotate&#160;Consist&#160;Heading&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Merge&#160;into&#160;Single&#160;Train&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Fine_Couple|Coupling Rolling Stock Objects]]''' for more details</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;in&#160;Assets&#160;Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>highlights the selected rolling stock object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Edit&#160;Properties&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens the '''Properties''' window of the selected rolling stock object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions"></span>
 +
=='''Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepMarquee]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Two '''Anchor Points''' on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor line determine the height of an endpoint or an object above the ground.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''height''' of a '''Rolling Stock Object''' (locomotive, wagon, etc) '''CANNOT''' be altered</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Object Height Anchor''', which is normally '''Black''' but turns '''Green''' when it is selected, controls the height of the object (including spline '''Endpoints''') above the ground. This Anchor point can be moved vertically by the tool pointer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Ground Height Anchor''', which is '''Yellow''', marks the position of the object on the ground. This Anchor point cannot be moved vertically by the tool pointer but its height can be changed by setting the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> value</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>It is common for both height anchors to be at the same height but there are many situation where the two will be at different heights. The examples below show situations where the two are at different heights and the height of the '''Object Height Anchor''' will need to be adjusted.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>[[image:FineAdjustSplineHeightUp.png|300px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=700><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Object Height Above Ground Height&#160;</span><br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To bring the object height down to the ground height:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> downwards on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor line to bring the '''Object Height Anchor''' down to the same level as the '''Ground Height Anchor''' </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td colspan=2>To achieve finer and more accurate control when moving the height Anchor point, choose one of the following:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>zoom in closer to the Anchor point, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">OR</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> fine adjustment arrows in the '''Info Palette''' object '''Pos''' controls. This can be used to set the height and position to '''cm''' accuracy (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The Info Palette|The Info Palette]]''' below).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>[[image:FineAdjustSplineHeightDown.png|300px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=500><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Object Height Below Ground Height&#160;</span><br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To bring the object height up to the ground height:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> upwards on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor line to bring the '''Object Height Anchor''' up to the same level as the '''Ground Height Anchor''' </td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
[[image:FineAdjustSplineHeightOK.png|link=]]
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>
 +
[[image:FineAdjustSplineHeightFarDown.png|link]]</td>
 +
<td width=700>Where this method fails is when the height difference between the two Anchor points exceeds the length of the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor line so the '''Ground Height Anchor''' or the '''Object Height Anchor''' is at the very top of the Anchor line. Once it is in that position the '''Object Height Anchor''' can no longer be moved up or down because there is no vertical Anchor line to grab.
 +
<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td colspan=2>The '''Quick Solution''' to this problem is to:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>open the object or endpont '''Context Menu'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Settle on Ground&#160;</span>. For splines this option will force the spline segment to follow the contours of the ground but it will now be at the same height as the ground</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
A more complex alternative method is to use the '''Surveyor Compass Rose''', the '''Info Palette''' and the '''Tool Options Palette'''.
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=300>[[image:FineAdjustSplineSetFocus.png|link=]]<br>
 +
The '''Surveyor Compass Rose'''</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=700 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=696 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Right Click</span> on the terrain at a point which has the height that will be used by the object. This will position the '''Surveyor Compass Rose''' and record its data as the '''Focus'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Focus''' controls in the '''Info Palette''' by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the small '''Right Arrowhead''' to the left of the '''Focus''' label</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td></td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:InfoPaletteFocusUseHeight.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Info Palette''' stores the positional data, including the '''Height''' (the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> value), of the '''Compass Rose''' under the label '''Focus'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the white '''Down Arrowhead''' next to the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> value and select the menu option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Use&#160;Height&#160;for&#160;Brush&#160;</span>. This will transfer the Focus <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span> value to the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Open the '''Context Menu''' for the object (or spline endpoint)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint5.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply Height&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Apply&#160;Height&#160;to&#160;this&#160;Spline&#160;Endpoint&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepMarquee"></span>
 +
='''The Marquee Tool'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepFineAdjustment|alt=Next Up|Next Up]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepMass|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=40>[[image:S20_MarqueeToolIcon.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=160>'''Keyboard Shortcut:''' <span style="color: white; background-color: black; font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px;">&#160;F&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">The <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Marquee Tool&#160;</span> selects and copies objects, deletes baseboards, adds new baseboards and sets their properties, adds texture to baseboards in a Trainz World</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>Some features of this tool use the '''Scrapbook Palette''', '''Assets Palette''' and '''Tool Options Palette'''. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
The '''Marquee Tool''' has no drop down menu lists.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:MarqueeTools_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=800 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Marquee Tool''' draws out a rectangular area, the '''Marquee Selection Area''', on the route. Any objects (including '''Ground Heights''', '''Ground Textures''' and '''Effect Layers''') that are inside the '''Marquee Selection Area''' or touched by its boundary will be selected.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=796 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can use the '''Asset Palette''' filters to restrict the objects that will be selected in the '''Marquee Selection Area'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
[[image:MarqueeSelectArea_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>In the image above:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a road spline at the bottom and a house at the lower left of the '''Marquee Selection Area'''  have been overlain by the drawn rectangle so they have been included in the selection.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Marquee Selection Area''' was drawn from the top left to the bottom right which places the Marquee '''Context Icon''' at the bottom right of the rectangle.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the bottom right of the '''Marquee Selection Area''' also has a '''3D Anchor Frame'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The road spline was the last object that was included in the selection area so its '''Context Icons''' are also present.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Not shown in the image, because they are not highlighted, are the '''Ground Heights''', '''Ground Textures''' and '''Effect Layers''' that are also included in the '''Marquee Selection Area'''.
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=900>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=360>[[image:MarqueeAreaTools_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The Marquee Selection Area '''3D Anchor Frame''' has some similarities to the one used with the '''Fine Adjustment Tool.<br>
 +
<table width=540>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> horizontal Anchors will move the Marquee and all its contents in the Anchor direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> rotational Anchor will rotate the Marquee with all its contents in the direction of the rotation movement</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td bgcolor="yellow"><span style="font-weight: 700;">there are no <span style="font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> rotational Anchors</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>at the centre of the '''3D Anchor Frame''' is a '''Select Area Anchor'''. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> this Anchor point to move the Marquee with all its contents in any horizontal direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>each of the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> horizontal Anchors has a '''resize Anchor''', an orange coloured dot, located at its end. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> these Anchor points to resize the '''Marquee Selection Area''' (and its contents) in that specific direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To Create a '''Marquee Selection Area''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Marquee Tool''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> out the '''Marquee Selection Area''' around the objects to be selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter"></span>
 +
=='''The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Marquee Anchor Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepMarquee]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Assets Palette''' filter tools can be used to restrict the objects selected by the '''Marquee Tool'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=800>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200>[[image:AssetsPaletteFilterSelection_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=600>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=600 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=596 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To restrict the objects selected by the '''Marquee Tool''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>set the '''Filter Type''' in the '''Assets Palette''' to <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Filter Selection&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>set the other filter options in the '''Assets Palette''' to narrow down the type of objects (e.g. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Scenery Splines&#160;</span> and/or enter a partial name in the '''Text Box''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Marquee Tool''' from the '''Tools Palette''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F&#160;</span> key)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> out the '''Marquee Selection Area''' around the objects to be selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Only those objects identified in the '''Assets Palette''' filters will be selected by the '''Marquee'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Using the '''Filters''' shown above, the '''Marquee Selection Area''' only selects scenery spline objects.<br>
 +
 +
[[image:MarqueeSelectSplines_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Marquee Anchor Controls"></span>
 +
=='''Marquee Anchor Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Marquee Context Menu]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
The following images demonstrate the effect of using the '''Marquee Anchor Controls''' on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.<br>
 +
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Horizontal Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> horizontal Anchor has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaShift_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotational Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> rotational '''Anchor''' has been used to rotate the '''Marquee Selection Area''' about 45&#176; anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the '''Marquee Selection Area''' has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaRotate_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Vertical Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> vertical Anchor has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaUplift_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The '''Marquee Anchors''' will move:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the effect layers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the ground heights</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Marquee Context Menu"></span>
 +
=='''Marquee Anchor Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Marquee Context Menu]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
The following images demonstrate the effect of using the '''Marquee Anchor Controls''' on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.<br>
 +
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Horizontal Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> Horizontal Anchor</span> has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaShift_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rotational Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Rotational Anchor</span> has been used to rotate the '''Marquee Selection Area''' about 45&#176; anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the '''Marquee Selection Area''' has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaRotate_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Vertical Anchor Shift&#160;</span>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=950 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=946 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Vertical Anchor</span> has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.</td>
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=23>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MarqueeSelectAreaUplift_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=3>&#160;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=896>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The '''Marquee Anchors''' will move:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the effect layers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the ground heights</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Marquee Context Menu"></span>
 +
=='''Scrapbook Operations'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Managing Baseboards]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Marquee Context Menu]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=500 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=496 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Scrapbooks''', when created, will contain:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Heights'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Textures'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Effect Layers''' - if present</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Selected Objects''' - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: yellow;">&#160;But <u>NOT</u> Rolling Stock (Trains)&#160;</span>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=500 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=496 bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
'''Scrapbooks''', when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Heights'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Ground Textures'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Effect Layers'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scenery Objects (Meshes)''' - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scenery Splines''' - roads, track, fences, etc</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>You have options in the '''Scrapbook Filters''' that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Once an area has been marked out by the '''Marquee Tool''' a number of options become available.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=165>[[image:MarqueeEditMenu_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=835 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=831 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2>The [[image:SurveyorEditIcon.png|link=]] '''Surveyor Edit Menu''' will show some additional options specifically for the '''Marquee Tool''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the objects selected in the Marquee area (including the ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) will be copied and placed into a new '''Scrapbook'''. Any scenery objects (excluding '''ground heights''', '''ground textures''' and '''effect layers''') that are not in a locked layer will be removed from the Marquee area. This is the same as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;X&#160;</span></span> keys</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the objects selected in the Marquee area (including '''ground heights''', '''ground textures''' and '''effect layers''') will be copied and placed into a new '''Scrapbook'''. This is the same as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;C&#160;</span></span> keys</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Paste&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the contents of the current '''Scrapbook''' will be pasted into the route at the cursor (focus) point. Which contents will be pasted and how they will be pasted are controlled by the '''Filters''' in the '''Scrapbook Palette''' (see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Scrapbook_Data|Scrapbook Data]]''' for more details). This option will always be available with and without a Marquee area being marked if there is a scrapbook available to be pasted. This is the same as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;V&#160;</span></span> keys</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Clear&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the selected scenery '''objects''' that are not in locked layers will be removed from the Marquee area but '''NOT''' the selected '''ground heights''', '''ground textures''' and '''effect layers'''. This is the same as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;</span> key</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select&#160;None&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>the '''Marquee Selection Area''' boundary lines are removed from the route cancelling the selection process. Nothing that is inside the area will be removed. This is the same as pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;D&#160;</span></span> keys</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Adding a New Scrapbook&#160;</span>===
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span> '''Scrapbook''' operations are also found in the '''Marquee Context Menu''' (see the '''Marquee Context Menu''' section above).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You don't have to use the '''Marquee Tool''' to create a new '''Scrapbook'''. You can use the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' to select any number of objects and then press <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;C&#160;</span></span>. The selected objects, along with the ground height, ground textures, and any effect layers, will be copied into a new '''Scrapbook'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
When a new '''Scrapbook''' is created by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span>, it will appear in the '''Scrapbook''' palette with some basic details.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>[[image:ScrapbookNew_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table width=500>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The newly created scrapbook will be given:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a name consisting of the date and time of its creation</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a thumbnail</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>The thumbnail image will be taken using the current camera POV (point of view). To get a better image adjust the camera position and view to give the best possible shot of the '''Scrapbook''' objects before giving the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Cut&#160;</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span> command
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>a scrapbook number (it will be inserted as '''&#8470;1''' scrapbook)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>an expiry date which will be set 5 days after its creation - this will countdown each day until '''0''' when the new scrapbook will be deleted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Scrapbooks''' use very little memory so there is no real limit to how many you can store in the palette but finding the one you want will be more difficult as the list grows longer</td>
 +
</tr><tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Rolling Stock Objects''' cannot be added to a '''Scrapbook'''. The rolling stock '''Context Menu''' option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Save&#160;to&#160;Consist&#160;Asset...&#160;</span> performs some of the '''Scrapbook''' functions for rolling stock objects and consists</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Deleting a '''Scrapbook''' after it has been pasted does not delete the objects that it has added to the route</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=710>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=496>There are two changes that can be made to the new scrapbook:-<br>
 +
<table width=496>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Give it a name''' - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> inside the '''Name Text Box''' and type a new name. To set its new name <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the image (pressing the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Enter&#160;</span> key does not work - a known bug)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Make it permanent''' - <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the white '''Pin''' icon ([[image:ScrapbookUnPinnedIcon_S20.png|link=]]) to change it to blue. The scrapbook will no longer expire but it can still be deleted at any time</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>'''Pinned''' scrapbooks are always shown with a '''blue''' pin icon [[image:ScrapbookPinnedIcon_S20.png|link=]] and the words "pinned, no expiry" displayed next to their scrapbook &#8470;</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>The '''Pinning''' of any scrapbook can be reversed so that it will then expire in 5 days time. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> the blue pin icon.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=210>[[image:ScrapbookNewNamedPinned_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Once a scrapbook has been '''Pinned''' it becomes an asset and will appear in '''Content Manager'''<br>
 +
 +
[[image:ScrapbookEntryCM_S20.png|link=]]<br>
 +
 +
The scrapbook can be uploaded to the '''DLS''' and saved as a '''CDP''' file.<br>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can archive your scrapbooks as '''CDP''' files to keep the number of installed scrapbooks to a minimum. If an archived scrapbook is needed then you can use the '''Import Content Files''' option in '''Content Manager''' to add it to the '''Scrapbook Palette'''. It can be deleted from the palette later, when no longer needed.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Managing Baseboards"></span>
 +
=='''Managing Baseboards'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepMass]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Scrapbook Operations]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Marquee''' is a powerful tool for adding, deleting and changing the properties of multiple baseboards</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=450>[[image:S20_MarqueeDrawnArea.png|link=|alt=Marquee drawn area]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=550 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=546 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To add new baseboards:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>select the '''Marquee Tool''' (or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;F&#160;</span> key).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> to draw out an area where the new baseboards will be added. This area can include the current baseboard.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The '''Marquee Selection Area''', shown with a green border in the image on the left, covers the existing baseboard (black, bottom left) and where 3 new baseboards will be created. The Marquee has a '''Context Icon''' as shown in the image.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''Context Icon''' or press the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&nbsp;T&nbsp;</span> key to open up the '''Marquee Context Menu''' (see '''Marquee Context Menu''' above).</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint4.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Create, Convert, Delete</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To '''Create''' new baseboards, and to '''Convert''' selected baseboards to a different '''Grid Resolution''', select the '''Context Menu''' option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Convert&#160;Baseboards&#160;To&#160;&gt;&#160;</span> then select a resolution from two sub-options, <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;5m Grid&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;10m Grid&#160;</span>. If existing baseboards have been selected then they will also be converted to the new resolution.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To '''Delete''' baseboards select the '''Context Menu''' option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Delete&#160;Baseboards&#160;in&#160;Marquee&#160;</span>. The <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Z&#160;</span></span> keys can '''Undo''' the deletion.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>To set the selected baseboards to the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> value in the '''Tool Options Palette''' select the '''Context Menu''' option <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Set Marquee to Brush Height&#160;</span>. If the '''Marquee''' extends over "empty space" then new baseboards will be created at the set <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> value.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepMass"></span>
 +
='''Mass Object Moves and Clones'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#Cloning Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Managing Baseboards]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepMarquee|alt=Next Up|Next Up]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextDown.png|link=#stepInfo|alt=Next Down|Next Down]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=900 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=896 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>Both the '''Free Move Tool''' and the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' can move and clone (copy) single and multiple objects. The '''Marquee Tool''' can also move and clone objects but it will include the '''Ground Surface Height''', '''Ground Textures''' and any '''Effect Layers''' in the cloning and moving operations.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
=='''Selecting and Moving Multiple Objects'''==
 +
 +
Multiple objects can be selected and moved with the '''Free Move Tool''' and the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes: Mass Moves'''</span><br>
 +
----
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The objects do not have to be:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the same type. They can be a mixture of scenery splines and mesh objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>in the same layers but objects in '''Locked''' layers cannot be moved</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=500 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=496 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can also use the '''Marquee Tool''' to move objects but this will move '''Ground Heights''', '''Ground Textures''' and '''Effect Layers''' as well as objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:MultipleSelectionGroup_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To select multiple objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Free Move Tool''' or '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span></span> on every object that is to be included in the selection group</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can apply the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> setting in the '''Tool Options Palette''' to the entire group of selected objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:MultipleSelectionGroupMove_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=400 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=396 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To move multiple objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> the '''selected''' objects in the required direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Release the mouse button when the group of objects are in position</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>The '''Fine Adjustment Tool <span style="font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span> Rotation Anchor''' can be used to rotate all the members of the group with the last selected object (the one with the '''Context Icon''') as the centre of rotation</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
===<span style="font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Selecting Multiple Identical Objects&#160;</span>===
 +
 +
You can quickly select all nearby identical objects by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on an object.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>This also applies to all the wagons in a consist. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on any one of them to select all of them - they do not have to be identical wagons.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=500>A forest of many different trees. Only one has been selected.</td>
 +
<td width=500><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span> on a tree to select all the identical trees in the forest.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:MultipleSelectTip1_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>[[image:MultipleSelectTip2_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Shift&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Double Left Click</span></span> on another object. It and all its identical copies will be added to the selection.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Cloning Objects"></span>
 +
=='''Cloning Objects'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepInfo]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepMass]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>You can easily clone single and multiple selected objects. If you have selected a group of objects they do not have to be the same type - you can select scenery objects and scenery splines.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000 cellpadding=2 bgcolor=#ff0000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 cellpadding=2 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Bug.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">Known Issues:'''</span><br>
 +
Cloning does not work with '''Track Objects''' (signals, speed signs, switches, etc) but it does work with track spline and rolling stock objects. This has been reported as a bug.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes: Layers and Cloning'''</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the objects can be in different layers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the layers can be locked and the objects will still be cloned</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all the cloned objects will be placed into the current '''Active Layer''' which must be '''Unlocked'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>For more information on layers see [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#The_Info_Palette|The Info Palette]]''' at the end of this document.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=804 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=800 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=800>
 +
<table width=800>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Steps:</span> To clone an object or a group of objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>use either the '''Free Move Tool''' or the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''' to select the object or objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Ctrl&#160;</span>&#160;+&#160;<span style="background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span></span> on any of the selected objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table width=800>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveCloneSelect_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=400>[[image:FreeMoveCloneMoved_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="stepInfo"></span>
 +
='''The Info Palette'''=
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#Focus Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Cloning Objects]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepMass|alt=Next Up|Next Up]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>[[image:BackToBottom.png|link=#bottom|alt=Bottom|Bottom]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor=#000000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=996 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>If the '''Info Palette''' is not visible on the screen then refer to [[image:PageLink.PNG|link=]]&#160;'''[[#Notes_Palettes|Notes: Palettes]]''' at the top of this document. Some '''Info Palette''' functions will also require the '''Assets Palette''' and the '''Tool Options Palette'''.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:S20_PaletteInfo.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=790>
 +
<table width=790 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>This palette can be easily overlooked but it has some very useful features:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>providing precise data and control over the "focus" - the position of the cursor</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>providing precise data and control over the position and orientation of objects (it can be used instead of the '''Free Move Tool''' and the '''Fine Adjustment Tool''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>identifying and setting the "home" layer and binding layer of a selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>used for locking and unlocking a selected objects layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
The components of the '''Info Palette''' are identified in the image below.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=370>[[image:InfoPalette_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td valign="middle">Each of the small arrowhead icons will open the palette to display more information and some controls.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
All the positional data and controls in the '''Info Palette''' are defined in the following ways:-<br>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>is '''ALWAYS''' the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;North-South&#160;</span> compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>is '''ALWAYS''' the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;East-West&#160;</span> compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;z&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>is '''ALWAYS''' the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Vertical&#160;</span> direction (perpendicular to the compass directions) regardless of how an object has been rolled or tilted</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>distances are measured in '''metres''' from the '''North-West''' corner of the first baseboard. If that baseboard is later deleted then distances will '''still''' be measured from its original and now "virtual" North-West corner.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;+&#160;</span> positive distances are in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;South&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;East&#160;</span> directions</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;-&#160;</span> negative distances are in the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;North&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;West&#160;</span> directions</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>New boards added to the '''North''' of the first baseboard will have negative '''x''' coordinates and new boards added to the '''West''' of the first baseboard will have negative '''y''' coordinates.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Focus Info and Controls"></span>
 +
=='''Focus Info and Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Asset Name Menu]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#stepInfo]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Focus''' shows the current position and height of the '''Cursor''' object.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
Open up the '''Focus''' by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its arrowhead icon.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>Before changing the cursor position with the '''Focus''' controls, set a '''Bookmark''' at its current position.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteFocus_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<br>
 +
The current cursor position is shown in the '''x''', '''y''' and '''z''' text boxes. These values can be edited to move the cursor to a new position but '''CARE''' will be needed.
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>On the right of each data entry box is a pair of '''Up/Down''' arrow controls. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to '''centimetres'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
If you enter an '''x''' or '''y''' value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the cursor will be refocused at a point on the baseboard edge that is the closest to the entered co-ordinates.
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>If it has not been deleted you can identify the original (first) baseboard by entering <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">0</span> as the '''Focus''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;x&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> co-ordinates</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Next to the '''z''' co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the arrowhead to open its menu.<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=325>[[image:InfoPaletteFocusMenu_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>There is only one option in the sub-menu. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Use&#160;Height&#160;for&#160;Brush&#160;</span><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the option to copy the current cursor height ('''z''') value from the '''Info Palette''' to the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> entry.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Asset Name Menu"></span>
 +
=='''Asset Name Menu'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Position Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Focus Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
You must have an object (or objects) selected for a name to be shown and for this menu to be available.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteMulti_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If more than one object has been selected then the name and position data shown will be for the last selected object. If different objects (with different '''kuid''' codes) have been selected then a count of the additional objects will be added. The '''(+2)''' shown in the object name in the image on the left indicates that 2 additional different objects are in the group of selected objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Next to the objects name is a small white '''Down Arrowhead'''. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the arrowhead to open its menu.<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=370>[[image:InfoPaletteMenu_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=630>The menu options are:-
 +
<table width=630 bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=626 bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Copy&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;NOT WORKING&#160;</span><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: #fcbcbc;"> (a known bug) </span> - copies the objects text details into the OS Clipboard for pasting, for example, into a text editor</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Show Asset Details&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens a new window showing the image and description of the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;List Assets in New Window&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>opens up '''Content Manager''' and lists all the selected objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Add to Picklist&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>adds selected objects to a '''Picklist'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Remove from Picklist&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>removes selected objects from a '''Picklist''' (objects must already be in a '''Picklist''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select in Assets Palette&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>selects and highlights the selected object in the '''Assets Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Position Info and Controls"></span>
 +
=='''Position Info and Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Rotation Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Asset Name Menu]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
You must have an object (or objects) selected for the position data to be shown and edited. Open up the position data by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its '''Pos:''' arrowhead icon.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPalettePos_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The position of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the '''x''', '''y''' and '''z''' text boxes. These values can be edited to move the object or objects to a new position but '''CARE''' will be needed.
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>On the right of each data entry box is a pair of '''Up/Down''' arrow controls. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to '''centimetres'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
If you enter an '''x''' or '''y''' value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the objects will be moved to that position and may vanish from view. The '''Undo''' command can be used to reverse the move or the '''Marquee Tool''' can be used to add a baseboard under the "floating" objects.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
Next to the '''z''' co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the arrowhead to open its menu.<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=325>[[image:InfoPalettePosMenu_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>There is only one option in the sub-menu. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Use&#160;Height&#160;for&#160;Brush&#160;</span><br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the option to copy the current cursor height ('''z''') value from the '''Info Palette''' to the '''Tool Options Palette''' <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: gold; background-color: black;">&#160;Height&#160;</span> entry.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Rotation Info and Controls"></span>
 +
=='''Rotation Info and Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#skip Layer Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Position Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
You must have an object (or objects) selected for the rotation data to be shown and edited. Open up the rotation data by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its '''Rot:''' arrowhead icon.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteRot_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=790>The rotational orientation of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the '''r''', '''p''' and '''y''' text boxes (the letters stand for '''R'''oll, '''P'''itch and '''Y'''aw). These values can be edited to rotate the object or objects in 3D space '''BUT''' not all objects can be rotated in certain directions.
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If several objects have been selected then the last selected object, the one with the '''Context Icon''', will be the centre of all rotations.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Not all objects will allow rotations. For example, '''SpeedTree''' objects can only be rotated using the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> value (<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;r&#160;</span> and <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;p&#160;</span> entries will be ignored) while '''Spline''' objects cannot be rotated at all</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>On the right of each box is a pair of '''Up/Down'''  arrow controls. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click and Drag</span> up or down on these to adjust the rotation angle in increments of 1&#176;.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
The rotation data and controls are defined in the following ways:-<br>
 +
<table width=970>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;r&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>'''ALWAYS''' rotates in the '''vertical plane''' around the <span style="font-weight: 700; text-decoration: underline;">selected objects</span> '''Y''' axis (which was defined when it was created).<br>
 +
This is the same as the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: red;">&#160;Red&#160;</span> '''Rotational Anchor''' in the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;p&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>'''ALWAYS''' rotates in the '''vertical plane''' around the <span style="font-weight: 700; text-decoration: underline;">selected objects</span> '''Y''' axis '''PLUS''' '''90&#176;'''.<br>
 +
This is the same as the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: green;">&#160;Green&#160;</span> '''Rotational Anchor''' in the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 17px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span></td>
 +
<td>'''ALWAYS''' rotates in the '''horizontal plane''' around the <span style="font-weight: 700; text-decoration: underline;">compass</span> '''Z''' or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Vertical</span> axis regardless of how the object has been rolled or pitched.<br>
 +
This is similar to but <span style="font-weight: 700; text-decoration: underline;">NOT exactly the same</span> as the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Blue&#160;</span>  '''Rotational Anchor''' in the '''Fine Adjustment Tool'''
 +
<table>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td width=170 align="right"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;"><span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Rot:&#160;</span> <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y&#160;</span> = </span></td>
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">0&#176;</span> '''East'''</td>
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">90&#176;</span> '''North'''</td>
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">180&#176;</span> '''West'''</td>
 +
<td width=200><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">270&#176;</span> '''South'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Original</span><br>[[image:RotationAxis_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Roll: <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;r = 45&#160;</span></span><br>[[image:RotationAxisRoll_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Pitch: <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;p = 45&#160;</span></span><br>[[image:RotationAxisPitch_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td align="center"><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Yaw: <span style="color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;y = 45&#160;</span></span><br>[[image:RotationAxisYaw_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Some objects will '''NOT''' allow <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Roll</span> or <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Pitch</span> rotations</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>all angles are measured in degrees</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;+&#160;</span> positive angles are '''anticlockwise''' when viewed facing the rotation axis direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">&#160;-&#160;</span> negative angles are '''clockwise''' when viewed facing the rotation axis direction</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>angles greater than 360&#176; can be entered but will give the same result as the angle '''minus''' 360&#176;. For example: 450&#176; is exactly the same angle as 90&#176; (450&#176;-360&#176;=90&#176;)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>clockwise and anti-clockwise angles are complementary. For example: entering -270&#176; (clockwise) will give the same angle as entering +90&#176; (anticlockwise)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Layer Info and Controls"></span>
 +
=='''Layer Info and Controls'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#Assigning Objects to a Different Layer]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Rotation Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
You must have an object (or objects) selected for the layer data to be shown and edited. Open up the layer data by a <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on its '''Layer:''' arrowhead icon.<br>
 +
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Info Palette''' is best used to show and edit the '''layer''' and '''binding layer''' assignments of individual selected objects</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>operations such as '''creating, deleting, merging, renaming, moving''' and '''hiding layers''' are performed using the '''Layers Palette'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>layers can be '''Locked''' and '''Unlocked''' using the '''Info Palette''' or the '''Layers Palette''' but the '''Layers Palette''' is often the better choice for these tasks</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteLayer_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>This will show the:-
 +
<table width=790>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>current layer assigned to the selected object</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>its assigned '''Binding Layer''' (if any)</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the '''Locked''' or '''Unlocked''' state of the assigned layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:InfoPaletteLockedLayerBtn_S20.png|link=]] Layer is currently '''Unlocked'''. Click this button to '''Lock''' the layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>[[image:InfoPaletteUnlockedLayerBtn_S20.png|link=]] Layer is currently '''Locked'''. Click this button to '''Unlock''' the layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>&#160;</td>
 +
<td>Using this button will also change the '''Locked''' or '''Unlocked''' padlock icon shown next to the layer name in the '''Layers Palette'''<br>
 +
<table width=780>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:AssetsPaletteLockedUnlockedLayers_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Objects in a '''Locked Layer''' cannot be deleted or moved</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>'''Locked Layers''' can be deleted, moved and merged with other layers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteLayersMulti_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=790>If multiple objects from different layers have been selected then no layer name will be shown in the '''Layer''' and '''Binding''' boxes. Instead they will be left "blank" as shown in the image on the left.<br><br>
 +
 +
Both boxes can still be opened to assign layers to objects.
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ff0000 width=790 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#fcbcbc width=786 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:Stop.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 15px; font-weight: 700;">WARNING:</span>
 +
<table>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Setting a layer for multiple objects that are in different layers will move ALL those objects to that layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If objects are moved from one layer group to another (such as from the '''Route Layers''' to the '''Session Layers''') then it will change where those objects are saved (in the '''Route''' or in the '''Session''')</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Assigning Objects to a Different Layer"></span>
 +
=='''Assigning Objects to a Different Layer'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Layer Info and Controls]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
A selected object or group of selected objects can be assigned to a different layer. If multiple objects have been selected then they '''do not''' have to all be in the same layer.<br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=265>[[image:InfoPaletteLayerDropBoxList_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td width=735>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=735 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=731 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To change the assigned layer of an object or group of objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''Layer''' drop down box. The layer containing the object (for a '''single selected object only''') will be shown with a [[image:BulletTick.png|link=]] in front of its name</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the destination layer name from the drop down list. '''See Warning''' above</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The layer reassignment will start the instant the destination layer is selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If you see a '''Debugging Window''' on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>Once a target layer has been selected then the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select Layer&#160;</span> button, which sets the '''Active Layer''', may become active.<br><br>
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Active Layer''' is the layer used by the '''Placement Tool''' when objects are added to a route (or session). This button gives you the opportunity to set the '''Active Layer''' to the same layer that you just used to assign to an object. Its use is '''optional'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffe0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:PencilTips.PNG|link=]]</td><td>You can also set the '''Active Layer''' by selecting its name from the list in the '''Layers Palette'''.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">Options:</span> To set current layer to the '''Active Layer''':-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:Ablue.png|link=]] '''If the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select Layer&#160;</span> button is greyed out'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOff_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>then the selected object is now assigned to the current '''Active Layer''' so there is no need to use this option</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>[[image:Bblue.png|link=]] '''If it is NOT greyed out'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOn_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>then the selected object is now assigned to a layer that is '''not''' the current '''Active Layer'''. <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the <span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: black;">&#160;Select Layer&#160;</span> button to switch the '''Active Layer''' to the same layer as the object
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="skip Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer"></span>
 +
=='''Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer'''==
 +
</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipDown.png|link=#stepTools]]</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#skip Assigning Objects to a Different Layer]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>&#160;</td> <!-- for Top -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Up -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Section Nav Buttons -->
 +
 +
<table width=1000 bgcolor="lightcyan" cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:BlueDot10x10.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Binding Layer''', or '''Bound Layer''' as it is also called, is a tool used in the development of a route or session. It allows you to temporarily assign an object to a second layer while it is still in its original layer. The object will then take on the properties ('''Locked''' or '''Unlocked''', '''Hidden''' or '''Visible''') of both layers.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=454 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=450 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=150 align="center">'''Assigned<br>Layer'''</td>
 +
<td rowspan=9 bgcolor="black" width=1></td> <!-- Row count -->
 +
<td width=150 align="center">'''Binding<br>Layer'''</td>
 +
<td rowspan=9 bgcolor="black" width=1></td> <!-- Row count -->
 +
<td width=150 align="center">'''Object<br>Status'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td bgcolor="black" colspan=5></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LayerUnLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''Unlocked'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerUnLocked_S20.png|link=]] or '''None'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerUnLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''Unlocked'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td bgcolor=#ffffb0>[[image:LayerLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''LOCKED'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerLocked_S20.png|link=]] or [[image:LayerUnLocked_S20.png|link=]] or '''None'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor=#ffffb0>[[image:LayerLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''LOCKED'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LayerUnLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''Unlocked'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor=#ffffb0>[[image:LayerLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''LOCKED'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor=#ffffb0>[[image:LayerLocked_S20.png|link=]] '''LOCKED'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr>
 +
<td bgcolor="black" colspan=5></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LayerEyeOpen_S20.png|link=]] '''Visible'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerEyeOpen_S20.png|link=]] or '''None'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerEyeOpen_S20.png|link=]] '''Visible'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td bgcolor="lightcyan">[[image:LayerEyeClosed_S20.png|link=]] '''HIDDEN'''</td>
 +
<td>[[image:LayerEyeOpen_S20.png|link=]] or [[image:LayerEyeClosed_S20.png|link=]] or '''None'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor="lightcyan">[[image:LayerEyeClosed_S20.png|link=]] '''HIDDEN'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LayerEyeOpen_S20.png|link=]] '''Visible'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor="lightcyan">[[image:LayerEyeClosed_S20.png|link=]] '''HIDDEN'''</td>
 +
<td bgcolor="lightcyan">[[image:LayerEyeClosed_S20.png|link=]] '''HIDDEN'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=550>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;">In Summary:-</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td bgcolor=#ffffb0>If the '''Assigned Layer''' or the '''Binding Layer''' of an object is '''Locked''' then the object will be '''Locked'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td bgcolor="lightcyan">If the '''Assigned Layer''' or the '''Binding Layer''' of an object is '''Hidden''' then the object will be '''Hidden'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffb0 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=25>[[image:NotePad.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-size: 17px; font-weight: 700;">Notes:</span><br>
 +
----
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Objects in a '''Hidden Layer''' cannot be seen and therefore, cannot be selected, deleted or moved</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>The '''Layers Palette''' is the ONLY way to create, delete, name and hide layers</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=1000 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=996 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>Some examples of using the '''Binding Layer''':-<br>
 +
<span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Example 1:&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=100>'''The problem:'''</td>
 +
<td>You need to stop an object from being selected so that you can you move other objects on or around it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>'''The solution:'''</td>
 +
<td>Use the '''Layers Palette''' to create a new empty layer and lock it. Set the '''Binding Layer''' of the object to the new locked layer. The object will then be locked so it cannot be selected or moved even though its original layer is unlocked. When the edit has been completed delete the empty locked layer you just created to unlock all its bound objects and remove all their bindings
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; color: white; background-color: blue;">&#160;Example 2:&#160;</span></td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>'''The problem:'''</td>
 +
<td>A group of objects (e.g trees) are blocking access to another object.</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>'''The solution:'''</td>
 +
<td>Use the '''Layers Palette''' to create a new empty layer and hide it. Set the '''Binding Layer''' of the blocking objects to the new hidden layer. The blocking objects will no longer be visible and cannot be selected even though their original layer is still visible. When the edit has been completed delete the empty hidden layer you just created to make all its bound objects visible and remove all their bindings
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=265>[[image:InfoPaletteBindingDropBox_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#000000 width=735 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>
 +
<table bgcolor=#ffffff width=731 cellpadding=2>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px;;">Steps:</span> To change the assigned binding layer of an object or group of objects:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=20>[[image:DotPoint1.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td><span style="font-weight: 700; font-size: 15px; background-color: lightcyan;">Left Click</span> on the '''Binding''' drop down box. If the object is already bound to a layer (for a '''single selected object only''') the binding layer will be shown with a [[image:BulletTick.png|link=]] in front of its name</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint2.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>Select the '''Binding''' layer name from the drop down list. '''Note:''' the objects assigned layer will not appear in the list because an object cannot be bound to its own layer</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>The layer reassignment will start the instant the layer is selected</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint3.JPG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>If you see a '''Debugging Window''' on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td colspan=2>As an example, the image below shows what you will see for a single object that has had:-</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=210>[[image:InfoPaletteLayerSetBindingSet_S20.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<table width=790>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=10>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>its assigned layer changed (in the example from "route-layer" to "Station Buildings")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>its binding layer set (in the example to "Multi Industries")</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the newly assigned layer is not locked so you have the option to lock it</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:DotPoint.JPG|10px|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>the newly assigned layer is not the '''Active Layer''' so you have the option to make it the '''Active Layer'''</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table cellpadding=2 bgcolor="Aquamarine">
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:LinkWiki.PNG|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
More information on creating, editing and using '''Layers''' can be found on the '''Trainz Wiki''' at:-<br>
 +
:'''[[How_to_Use_Layers|How to Use Layers]]'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
<br>
 +
<table width=1000> <!-- BEGIN Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td width=629><span id="bottom"></span></td>
 +
<td width=50>&#160;</td>
 +
<td width=50>[[image:SkipUp.png|link=#Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer]]</td>
 +
<td width=46>[[image:BackToTop.png|link=#top|alt=Top|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>[[image:NextUp.png|link=#stepInfo|alt=Next Up|Top]]</td>
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Next Down -->
 +
<td width=75>&#160;</td> <!-- for Bottom -->
 +
</tr>
 +
</table> <!-- END Nav Buttons Table -->
 +
----
 +
----
 +
 +
='''Trainz Wiki'''=
 +
<table cellpadding=4 bgcolor=#ffffff>
 +
<tr valign="top">
 +
<td>[[image:TrainzWiki.png|link=]]</td>
 +
<td>
 +
<span style="font-size: 17px;">'''More Tutorials and Guides to Using Trainz'''</span><br>
 +
*'''<span class="plainlinks">[http://online.ts2009.com/mediaWiki/index.php/HowTo How to Guides]</span>'''
 +
*'''[[Driver Commands List]]'''
 +
*'''[[Session Rule List with Parameters|Session Rules List (Alphabetical) with Parameters]]'''
 +
*'''[[Session Rules By Categories With Properties|Session Rules List (Categories) With Parameters]]'''
 +
</td>
 +
</tr>
 +
</table>
 +
----
 +
This page was created by Trainz user '''<span class="plainlinks">[http://online.ts2009.com/mediaWiki/index.php/User:Pware pware]</span>''' in January 2023 and was last updated as shown below.
 +
----
 +
[[Category:How-to guides]]
 +
 
=='''Edit Effect Layers...'''==
 
=='''Edit Effect Layers...'''==
 
</td>
 
</td>

Revision as of 17:14, 25 May 2023

The information in this Wiki Page applies to Surveyor 2.0 (S20) as found in Trainz Plus. The original reference material for this document can be found at WikiLink.PNG Surveyor 2.0 Overview

          Next Down Bottom

Contents

Surveyor 2.0  Mouse  and  Keyboard  Aids and Shortcuts
 Operations 
 LClick  Left Click on an object to Select it
 Shift   LClick  hold down the Shift key and Left Click on another object to add it to the Selection
 LClick   Drag  Left Click and Drag to Move an object or a group of selected objects
 RClick  Right Click on the terrain to Move the Compass Rose and Focus to that location
 DLClick  Double Left Click on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single Selection
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a consist all the wagons in the consist, regardless of type, will be selected
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a spline or track all the segments upto the next junction will be selected
 Shift   DLClick  hold down the Shift key and Double Left Click on another object to add it and its nearby identical objects to those already in the Selection
 Ctrl   LClick   Drag  hold down the Ctrl key and Left Click and Drag to Clone an object or selected objects
 Ctrl   C  press Ctrl + C to Copy selected objects (including the ground height, ground textures and any effect layers) into a new Scrapbook
 Ctrl   D  press Ctrl + D to Unselect a selected object (or ALL objects if multiple objects have been selected)
 Ctrl   E  press Ctrl + E to open the Route Editor (to edit the route name, description, thumbnail, scale, etc)
 Ctrl   F  press Ctrl + F to open the Object Finder
 Ctrl   F1  press Ctrl + F1 to switch from Driver to Surveyor via the UDS inteface
 Ctrl   F2  press Ctrl + F2 to switch from Surveyor to Driver via the UDS inteface
 Ctrl   M  press Ctrl + M to open the Mini Map
 Ctrl   R  press Ctrl + R to open the Session Editor (to edit the session name, description and rules)
 Ctrl   S  press Ctrl + S to Save the current route and/or session (which ever has been edited)
 Ctrl   V  press Ctrl + V to Paste the current Scrapbook into the route at the cursor position (the Surveyor Compass Rose). The current settings in the Scrapbook Palette Filter will control which objects are pasted and how they are pasted
 Ctrl   X  press Ctrl + X to Cut and remove selected objects from the route and place them into a new Scrapbook. The ground height, ground textures, effect layers and any objects in locked layers will be copied, not cut
 Ctrl   Y  press Ctrl + Y to Redo (reverse) the last  Ctrl   Z  command
 Ctrl   Z  press Ctrl + Z to Undo previous actions
 Ctrl   Space  press Ctrl + Space to show/hide the User Interface (the Trainz Main Menu icons and all the docked palettes - undocked palettes will still be visible)
 Alt  hold down the Alt key and hover the tool pointer over an object to Identify it
 Alt   LClick  hold down the Alt key and Left Click on an object to Select it in the Assets Palette
 Delete  press the Delete key to Delete a selected object or objects from the route
 Tools 
 W  selects the Brush Tool S20 BrushToolIcon.png ToolsKeyboard S20.png
 E  selects the Placement Tool S20 PlacementToolIcon.png
 R  selects the Eyedropper Tool S20 DropperToolIcon.png
 S  selects the Free Move Tool S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png
 D  selects the Fine Adjustment Tool S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png
 F  selects the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png
 T  opens the Context Menu of a selected object ContextIconsOneRow S20.png


NotePad.PNG Assets and Objects

(from the Surveyor 2.0 Overview document)

In this online documentation, the term Asset is used when talking about the items listed in Content Manager and the Asset Palette. Every asset has a KUID (unique identifier). When an asset (selected in the Assets Palette) is placed into the world, the instance of the asset in the world is referred to as an Object. There are multiple types of object, such as Scenery, Splines, Trains, Trackside, etc.


Surveyor 2.0 vs Surveyor Classic

    Top   Next Down Bottom
Surveyor 2.0
Surveyor 2.0 (or S20) is the new Surveyor interface provided to Trainz Plus Gold and Trainz Plus Standard subscribers as an alternative to Surveyor Classic. Classic is still available as an option in Trainz Plus. S20 is also available in TRS22 for Trainz Plus subscribers only. TRS22 without the subscription will have Surveyor Classic.
Whats New
BlueDot10x10.png a single set of common tools that can be applied to ALL types of objects
BlueDot10x10.png the ability to select multiple objects of different types that can be manipulated as one with more freedom than was previously possible
BlueDot10x10.png each object has its own Context Menu that applies specific actions depending on the type of object
BlueDot10x10.png information and controls in dockable and moveable Palettes that can be hidden when not needed
BlueDot10x10.png a new Scrapbook asset to store "scenes" that can be pasted anywhere in a route, between routes and shared through the DLS
BlueDot10x10.png a new Marquee Tool that allows:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png multiple baseboards to be added, deleted and have their height, ground texture and grid resolution changed in a single operation
DotPointBlueSquare.png objects, ground heights, ground textures and effect layers to be moved and copied


The following screen images help illustrate the change in philosophy that has occurred with the release of the Surveyor 2.0 user interface.

 Surveyor Classic 

2002 - 2022

Surveyor10Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG all the tools are in separate fixed Tabbed Flyouts with a different Flyout and set of tools for each type of object (scenery, track, terrain, textures, trains, etc)
DotPoint.JPG the workflow forces you to select the correct tool for the type of object and then apply it to just a single object at a time


 Surveyor 2.0 

2022 -

Surveyor20Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG there is just one set of tools that can be applied to all types of objects
DotPoint.JPG the workflow allows you to select multiple objects (that can be of different types) and then apply a selected tool or operation to them all


The Tools Palette

    Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png The Tools Palette is at the core of the new interface and takes the place of all the Tool Flyouts that have been the standard for Trainz Surveyor for many years. Some of the tools are new while others have been given a makeover and new abilities.
Tools and keymap for S20


The  Context Tool  is attached as an icon to a selected or newly placed object. The icon design will vary according to the type of object.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Palettes

If the Tools Palette is not shown on the screen, then:-

Windows Menu
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG open the Window Menu from the menu icons at the top of the screen
 
BulletTick.png visible palettes have ticks next to their names
BulletNoTick.png invisible (hidden) palettes have no ticks next to their names
DotPoint2.JPG simply Left Click on the name of a hidden palette or on the BulletNoTick.png next to its name. This will add a BulletTick.png and make the palette visible
DotPoint3.JPG make sure that the Tool Options Palette is also visible

There is a Trainz Wiki Page specifically covering the S20 Palettes at
WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes


The Brush Tool

SkipDown.png   Top Next Up Next Down Bottom


S20 BrushToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  W  The  Brush Tool  "paints" the ground height, ground textures, effect layers and scrapbook scenes in the Trainz World

The Brush Tool has two drop down menu lists.

Brush Tools
The first drop down menu will set the "Brush Target" which is the type of brush. Left Click on the drop down box and on a Target to select it:-
BulletTick.png Ground Height
BulletTick.png Ground Texture
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Data
BulletTick.png <List of Effect Layers>
BulletTick.png Edit Effect Layers
BrushToolsGroundOptions S20.png
NotePad.PNG If you have any Effect Layers then they will appear as Targets in this drop down list. Select an Effect Layer to use the brush to paint with that layer.


Ground Height

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target raises or lowers the Ground Surface Height by using a "painting" action
This brush tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.

When the  Ground Height  Target is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of several brush actions that control how the height is adjusted.

The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Height Up
BulletTick.png Height Down
BulletTick.png Set Height
BulletTick.png Grade
BrushToolsHeightOptions S20.png
Ground Height Brush Actions:
 Height Up 
 Height Down 
raises/lowers the ground at a rate controlled by the Tool Options Palette  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Set Height  "plateaus" the ground to the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Grade  creates a smooth slope at the Tool Options Palette  Grade  and  Angle  settings at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting


PencilTips.PNG The active height brush options for each action are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Height Up/Height Down 
Up/Down brush options
 Set Height 
Height brush options
 Grade 
Grade brush options

 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Height  the brush height (metres) - see Tips: below
Range:  -3000m to +3000m
 Sensitivity  the rate at which the Height changes
Range:  1% (very slowly) to 100% (very quickly)
 Grade  slope gradient - see Notes: below
Range:  0% = flat ("Plateau" in Classic) to
  ±100% = steep (but not vertical)
 Angle  grade direction (compass degrees)
Range:  0° (North) to ±359°
a negative value reverses the grade direction


PencilTips.PNG You can copy the current Ground Height of any spot in the route to the  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Using the Eyedropper option found in any brush tool
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG move the mouse pointer onto the spot on the terrain
DotPoint2.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click
OR
Bblue.png Using the  Height  setting and the compass
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click onto the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG Right Click inside the  Height  setting entry box
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the menu option
 Get Height at Compass 
OR
Cblue.png Using the Compass and the Info Palette
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click at the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG open the Focus controls in the Info Palette
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click the  z  control down arrowhead icon
DotPoint4.JPG select the menu option
 Use Height for Brush 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to set an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, to a specific height then the Marquee Tool would be a better choice.
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.
 
Steps: To set the Ground Surface Height:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint2.JPG select the brush Target (in this case  Ground Height )
DotPoint3.JPG select the brush Action ( Height Up ,  Height Down , etc)
DotPoint4.JPG set any brush controls ( Radius , Height ,  Sensitivity , etc) in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to change the terrain height


Ground Height Object Context Menu Options
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific Ground Height Options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu of the object.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the ground under the selected objects to match the set height of the objects. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object. This option is frequently used to raise and smooth the ground under track splines.
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected objects to match the height of the ground beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting


Ground Texture

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This tool paints the currently selected Ground Texture (from the Assets Palette) on the ground
This brush tool uses the Tool Options Palette and the Assets Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.

When the  Ground Texture  Target is selected, the second drop down box will be disabled - there are no brush texture actions.

PencilTips.PNG The active texture brush options are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


Texture brush options
 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Sensitivity  texture transparency
Range:  1% = almost transparent to
  100% = solid (opaque)
 Rotation  initial rotation angle - see Notes: below
Range:  0° to ±360° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the texture pattern scaling factor as a %
Range:  0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, >100% larger than full size
Steps: To paint a Ground Texture:-
DotPoint1.JPG select your Ground Texture in the Assets Palette - you can use the Assets Palette filter options to narrow down the selection
DotPoint2.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Ground Texture  target from the Brush Tool drop down menu
DotPoint4.JPG set any brush controls ( Radius ,  Sensitivity ,  Rotation ,  Scale ) in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint with the texture
NotePad.PNG The  Height  setting has no effect on textures as they are always painted on the existing ground surface.


PencilTips.PNG You can identify and select an existing Ground Texture to use elsewhere in the route by:-

Steps:

DotPoint1.JPG Hold down the  Alt  key and move the pointer onto the texture to be selected. Its name will appear in the pointer ToolTip
DotPoint2.JPG While holding down the  Alt  key Left Click on the texture
The texture will be selected in the Assets Palette and the Ground Texture target in the Brush Tool will be activated so you can immediately start painting with the texture using the current Tool Options Palette settings


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to paint an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, then the Marquee Tool will be quicker but it will not give the options of changing the scale and rotation while painting the texture.
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  controls the starting angle for the texture when painting and is often used to avoid pattern repetition. As in Surveyor Classic, holding down the  [  or  ]  keys while painting will continuously change the rotation angle
Stop.PNG Warning: Changing the rotation angle during painting is not recommended for PBR Textures as this will significantly increase the memory useage (each rotation will load in another copy of the PBR texture).


Ground Texture Object Context Menu Option
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific Ground Texture Option, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu of the object.
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out. This option is frequently used to paint a texture under selected track (or other) splines.


 Default Baseboard Ground Texture 

When a new route is created or a new baseboard is added it will be covered with the ground texture for the selected Region or the default texture if no region has been set. This can be changed to a different texture (including to the standard TRS19/TRS22 grid pattern).
MainMenuSetGroundTexture.png
The easiest option is to disable the current default ground texture
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG open the SurveyorDisplayIcon.png Surveyor Display Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Ground  option
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Grid  sub-option. This will use the current grid texture.
A more complex solution is to edit an existing Region or create one of your own to add your preferred ground texture (such as the standard TRS22 grid pattern) to each new route you create and every new baseboard that you add.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Baseboard Ground Texture, chosen from the Surveyor Display Menu or by specifying a Region, will become the default for every new route you create, until you change it to something else


LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing Region assets can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


Scrapbook Data

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This tool paints the currently selected Scrapbook (from the Scrapbook Palette) on the ground
This brush tool uses both the Tool Options Palette and the Scrapbook Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document. Instructions on how to create Scrapbooks can be found in the PageLink.PNG Marquee Tool section of this document.


PencilTips.PNG A new scrapbook can be created by choosing one of the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png use the PageLink.PNG Marquee Tool to select an area of the route containing objects, OR
Bblue.png use the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool or the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool to select a group of individual objects for the scrapbook
In both cases once the area or objects have been selected use the Context Menu  Cut  or  Copy  options to place the objects into a new scrapbook.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
 But NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.


PencilTips.PNG
The current Scrapbook can be Pasted into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the Compass Rose) by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press  Ctrl  +  V , OR
Bblue.png selecting  Paste  from the Context Menu of a selected object
In both cases the Scrapbook will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a Marquee Selection Area that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current Scrapbook Palette filter settings


 The Scrapbook Brush Actions 

When the  Scrapbook Data  Target is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of two brush actions that control how the scrapbook is applied.

The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Brush
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Clone
BrushToolsScrapbookOptions S20.png
Scrapbook Brush Actions:
 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size

 Scrapbook Clone  will paint the scrapbook sized according to the Tool Options Palette  Scale  setting. See Notes below


NotePad.PNG Notes:

 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size.
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is small then the scrapbook contents will be compressed closer together
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is large then the contents will be spaced further apart
DotPoint.JPG Every Left Click will paste another complete scrapbook copy
DotPoint.JPG The  Scale  setting in the Tool Options Palette is ignored.
 Scrapbook Clone  will paste the scrapbook sized according to the  Scale  setting (100% = original size)
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is the same size as the scaled scrapbook then a single exact copy will be pasted
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is smaller than the scaled scrapbook in size then only the central part of the scrapbook will be revealed and more will be added when the brush is moved around until the "painted" area covers the same area as the scaled scrapbook. Further painting will clone or tile the scrapbook contents
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is larger than the scaled scrapbook in size then the contents will be cloned or tiled to fill the set brush radius
 
Stop.PNG WARNING:

Take care if setting both the  Scale  and the  Radius . Using extreme values for both, such as a very large brush radius and a very small scale value, can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents


PencilTips.PNG The active scrapbook brush options are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Scrapbook Brush 
Brush options
 Scrapbook Clone 
Clone options

 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Sensitivity  if the  Ground Height  option has been enabled in the Scrapbook Palette filter settings, then this will set the rate or speed at which the ground height will change
Range:  1% = slowest, 100% = fastest
 Rotation  initial rotation angle (degrees) - see Notes: below
Range:  0° to ±360° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the scrapbook scaling factor
Range:  0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, >100% larger than full size
 Shape  brush shape
Options:  BrushToolsScrapShapes S20.png  Circle  and  Square  will set the brush to the selected shape with the  Radius  setting the brush size
   Natural  will set the brush to the same shape as the Marquee that created the scrapbook, which may be rectangular. The  Radius  setting will scale the brush size


NotePad.PNG The Tool Options Palette  Height  setting has no effect on the Scrapbook. This feature is controlled by the Scrapbook Palette Filter  Ground Height  options.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases.
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  controls the starting angle for pasting the scrapbook objects. In Surveyor Classic you could only rotate and paste in 90° increments. In S20 you can rotate and paste at any angle.
DotPoint.JPG The  Ground Height  options in the Scrapbook Filters control how the terrain heights in the Scrapbook are applied
DotPoint.JPG Setting extreme values for the  Scale  and the  Radius  when using the  Scrapbook Data Clone Brush  can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents into the route
 
Steps: To "paint" with a Scrapbook asset:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Scrapbook Data  target from the Brush Tool first drop down menu
DotPoint3.JPG select a brush action ( Scrapbook Brush  or  Scrapbook Clone ) from the Brush Tool second drop down menu
DotPoint4.JPG select a Scrapbook asset to be painted (see the The Scrapbook Palette below)
DotPoint5.JPG open the Scrapbook Filter in the Scrapbook Palette and select the features to be pasted and their method of pasting (see The Scrapbook Filters below)
DotPoint6.JPG set any Brush controls (e.g.  Radius ) from the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint7.JPG Left Click or Left Click and Drag (depending on your brush settings) on the terrain to paint with the scrapbook asset


 The Scrapbook Palette 

ScrapbookToolsTop S20.png
ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.pngScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png Left Click on the pin icon to Lock (blue pin) and Unlock (white pin) the scrapbook. Locked scrapbooks are permanent (but can still be deleted). Unlocked scrapbooks will "expire" (self delete) after 5 days
DeleteIcon S20.png Left Click on the delete icon to delete the current scrapbook - most scrapbooks can be deleted (see Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks below on how to deal with the exceptions to this)
ScrapbookThumbnail S20.png The thumbnail of the currently displayed scrapbook and the one that will be painted or pasted into the route
ScrapbookCounter S20.png Identifies the currently displayed scrapbook (the first number) and the total number of stored scrapbooks (the second number)
ScrapbookLeftRight S20.png Left Click on the  <  or  >  to move forwards or backwards through the stored scrapbooks to select the scrapbook that will be added to the route
  The scrapbook name can be edited. Left Click inside the name box to edit or replace the current name. Left Click on the image to make the name change permanent and pin (lock) the scrapbook (pressing the  Enter  key does not work - a known bug)


NotePad.PNG Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks

Some scrapbooks are installed with Trainz and cannot be deleted. These scrapbooks have the label Prefab at the front of their names (you may have to scroll to the front of the name to see it). While they cannot be deleted they can be "disabled" so that they won't appear as an installed scrapbook. Unlocking them will not cause them to "expire" - after 5 days they will just become locked again.
Steps: To disable built-in scrapbooks
DotPoint1.JPG Open Content Manager and locate the "permanent" scrapbook or scrapbooks.
Search Tips: Name: starts with "Prefab"; Status: is Built-in; Type: is Misc
DotPoint2.JPG Highlight (select) the Scrapbook assets
DotPoint3.JPG Open the Content menu and select the  Disable  option
You can reverse this and enable any or all of these scrapbooks later if you need them.


 The Scrapbook Filters 

PencilTips.PNG You will probably need to undock and resize the Scrapbook palette to make full use of its filters. See the Trainz Wiki page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for undocking and resizing instructions


To Open the Scrapbook Filters:
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the arrowhead next to the  Filters:  label below the scrapbook image to open the scrapbook filters.
These filters control which elements in the scrapbook are added to the route and how they are added.


ScrapbookToolsBottom S20.png


PencilTips.PNG You can vary the appearance of the scrapbook when added to a route by painting or pasting it with different filter combinations. For Example:-
 Ground Height:   None  ground height data will not be pasted and the ground heights already in the target area will be used
 Ground Texture:  Overwrite  textures present in the scrapbook will replace those already in the target area
 Meshes:  Add  scenery objects in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Splines:  Add  scenery splines in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Effect Layers:   None  effect layers in the scrapbook will not be pasted and any already in the target area will be used
PencilTips.PNG You can also add more variety when painting a Scrapbook by changing its Tool Options Palette  Scale  and  Rotation  settings in combination with different Filter selections (as shown above)
 Scrapbook Painting/Pasting Options 
 What Data to Transfer 
    Ground Height  terrain height(s) used in the scrapbook
    Texture  textures used in the scrapbook
    Meshes  scenery objects (e.g. trees, buildings) used in the scrapbook
    Splines  spline objects used in the scrapbook
    Effect Layers  effect layers (TurfFX, Clutter, Water Layer) used in the scrapbook
 How to Transfer the Data
    None  do not paste/paint this feature
    Add  add this feature to those already present
    Overwrite  use this feature to replace those already present
For the Ground Height:-
    None  do not paste/paint the scrapbook ground heights, use the existing ground heights instead
    Absolute  use the ground heights in the scrapbook to replace the existing ground heights
    Relative  use the difference between the existing ground heights and those used in the scrapbook


PencilTips.PNG
The current Scrapbook can be Pasted into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the Compass Rose) by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press  Ctrl  +  V , OR
Bblue.png selecting  Paste  from the Context Menu of a selected object
In both cases the Scrapbook will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a Marquee Selection Area that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current Scrapbook Palette filter settings


The information in this Wiki Page applies to Surveyor 2.0 (S20) as found in Trainz Plus. The original reference material for this document can be found at WikiLink.PNG Surveyor 2.0 Overview

          Next Down Bottom
Surveyor 2.0  Mouse  and  Keyboard  Aids and Shortcuts
 Operations 
 LClick  Left Click on an object to Select it
 Shift   LClick  hold down the Shift key and Left Click on another object to add it to the Selection
 LClick   Drag  Left Click and Drag to Move an object or a group of selected objects
 RClick  Right Click on the terrain to Move the Compass Rose and Focus to that location
 DLClick  Double Left Click on an object to add it and all nearby identical objects into a single Selection
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a consist all the wagons in the consist, regardless of type, will be selected
DotPointBlueSquare.png when used on a spline or track all the segments upto the next junction will be selected
 Shift   DLClick  hold down the Shift key and Double Left Click on another object to add it and its nearby identical objects to those already in the Selection
 Ctrl   LClick   Drag  hold down the Ctrl key and Left Click and Drag to Clone an object or selected objects
 Ctrl   C  press Ctrl + C to Copy selected objects (including the ground height, ground textures and any effect layers) into a new Scrapbook
 Ctrl   D  press Ctrl + D to Unselect a selected object (or ALL objects if multiple objects have been selected)
 Ctrl   E  press Ctrl + E to open the Route Editor (to edit the route name, description, thumbnail, scale, etc)
 Ctrl   F  press Ctrl + F to open the Object Finder
 Ctrl   F1  press Ctrl + F1 to switch from Driver to Surveyor via the UDS inteface
 Ctrl   F2  press Ctrl + F2 to switch from Surveyor to Driver via the UDS inteface
 Ctrl   M  press Ctrl + M to open the Mini Map
 Ctrl   R  press Ctrl + R to open the Session Editor (to edit the session name, description and rules)
 Ctrl   S  press Ctrl + S to Save the current route and/or session (which ever has been edited)
 Ctrl   V  press Ctrl + V to Paste the current Scrapbook into the route at the cursor position (the Surveyor Compass Rose). The current settings in the Scrapbook Palette Filter will control which objects are pasted and how they are pasted
 Ctrl   X  press Ctrl + X to Cut and remove selected objects from the route and place them into a new Scrapbook. The ground height, ground textures, effect layers and any objects in locked layers will be copied, not cut
 Ctrl   Y  press Ctrl + Y to Redo (reverse) the last  Ctrl   Z  command
 Ctrl   Z  press Ctrl + Z to Undo previous actions
 Ctrl   Space  press Ctrl + Space to show/hide the User Interface (the Trainz Main Menu icons and all the docked palettes - undocked palettes will still be visible)
 Alt  hold down the Alt key and hover the tool pointer over an object to Identify it
 Alt   LClick  hold down the Alt key and Left Click on an object to Select it in the Assets Palette
 Delete  press the Delete key to Delete a selected object or objects from the route
 Tools 
 W  selects the Brush Tool S20 BrushToolIcon.png ToolsKeyboard S20.png
 E  selects the Placement Tool S20 PlacementToolIcon.png
 R  selects the Eyedropper Tool S20 DropperToolIcon.png
 S  selects the Free Move Tool S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png
 D  selects the Fine Adjustment Tool S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png
 F  selects the Marquee Tool S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png
 T  opens the Context Menu of a selected object ContextIconsOneRow S20.png


NotePad.PNG Assets and Objects

(from the Surveyor 2.0 Overview document)

In this online documentation, the term Asset is used when talking about the items listed in Content Manager and the Asset Palette. Every asset has a KUID (unique identifier). When an asset (selected in the Assets Palette) is placed into the world, the instance of the asset in the world is referred to as an Object. There are multiple types of object, such as Scenery, Splines, Trains, Trackside, etc.


Surveyor 2.0 vs Surveyor Classic

    Top   Next Down Bottom
Surveyor 2.0
Surveyor 2.0 (or S20) is the new Surveyor interface provided to Trainz Plus Gold and Trainz Plus Standard subscribers as an alternative to Surveyor Classic. Classic is still available as an option in Trainz Plus. S20 is also available in TRS22 for Trainz Plus subscribers only. TRS22 without the subscription will have Surveyor Classic.
Whats New
BlueDot10x10.png a single set of common tools that can be applied to ALL types of objects
BlueDot10x10.png the ability to select multiple objects of different types that can be manipulated as one with more freedom than was previously possible
BlueDot10x10.png each object has its own Context Menu that applies specific actions depending on the type of object
BlueDot10x10.png information and controls in dockable and moveable Palettes that can be hidden when not needed
BlueDot10x10.png a new Scrapbook asset to store "scenes" that can be pasted anywhere in a route, between routes and shared through the DLS
BlueDot10x10.png a new Marquee Tool that allows:-
DotPointBlueSquare.png multiple baseboards to be added, deleted and have their height, ground texture and grid resolution changed in a single operation
DotPointBlueSquare.png objects, ground heights, ground textures and effect layers to be moved and copied


The following screen images help illustrate the change in philosophy that has occurred with the release of the Surveyor 2.0 user interface.

 Surveyor Classic 

2002 - 2022

Surveyor10Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG all the tools are in separate fixed Tabbed Flyouts with a different Flyout and set of tools for each type of object (scenery, track, terrain, textures, trains, etc)
DotPoint.JPG the workflow forces you to select the correct tool for the type of object and then apply it to just a single object at a time


 Surveyor 2.0 

2022 -

Surveyor20Screen.png
DotPoint.JPG there is just one set of tools that can be applied to all types of objects
DotPoint.JPG the workflow allows you to select multiple objects (that can be of different types) and then apply a selected tool or operation to them all


The Tools Palette

    Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
BlueDot10x10.png The Tools Palette is at the core of the new interface and takes the place of all the Tool Flyouts that have been the standard for Trainz Surveyor for many years. Some of the tools are new while others have been given a makeover and new abilities.
Tools and keymap for S20


The  Context Tool  is attached as an icon to a selected or newly placed object. The icon design will vary according to the type of object.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Palettes

If the Tools Palette is not shown on the screen, then:-

Windows Menu
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG open the Window Menu from the menu icons at the top of the screen
 
BulletTick.png visible palettes have ticks next to their names
BulletNoTick.png invisible (hidden) palettes have no ticks next to their names
DotPoint2.JPG simply Left Click on the name of a hidden palette or on the BulletNoTick.png next to its name. This will add a BulletTick.png and make the palette visible
DotPoint3.JPG make sure that the Tool Options Palette is also visible

There is a Trainz Wiki Page specifically covering the S20 Palettes at
WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes


The Brush Tool

SkipDown.png   Top Next Up Next Down Bottom


S20 BrushToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  W  The  Brush Tool  "paints" the ground height, ground textures, effect layers and scrapbook scenes in the Trainz World

The Brush Tool has two drop down menu lists.

Brush Tools
The first drop down menu will set the "Brush Target" which is the type of brush. Left Click on the drop down box and on a Target to select it:-
BulletTick.png Ground Height
BulletTick.png Ground Texture
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Data
BulletTick.png <List of Effect Layers>
BulletTick.png Edit Effect Layers
BrushToolsGroundOptions S20.png
NotePad.PNG If you have any Effect Layers then they will appear as Targets in this drop down list. Select an Effect Layer to use the brush to paint with that layer.


Ground Height

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This Brush Target raises or lowers the Ground Surface Height by using a "painting" action
This brush tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.

When the  Ground Height  Target is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of several brush actions that control how the height is adjusted.

The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Height Up
BulletTick.png Height Down
BulletTick.png Set Height
BulletTick.png Grade
BrushToolsHeightOptions S20.png
Ground Height Brush Actions:
 Height Up 
 Height Down 
raises/lowers the ground at a rate controlled by the Tool Options Palette  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Set Height  "plateaus" the ground to the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Grade  creates a smooth slope at the Tool Options Palette  Grade  and  Angle  settings at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting


PencilTips.PNG The active height brush options for each action are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Height Up/Height Down 
Up/Down brush options
 Set Height 
Height brush options
 Grade 
Grade brush options

 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Height  the brush height (metres) - see Tips: below
Range:  -3000m to +3000m
 Sensitivity  the rate at which the Height changes
Range:  1% (very slowly) to 100% (very quickly)
 Grade  slope gradient - see Notes: below
Range:  0% = flat ("Plateau" in Classic) to
  ±100% = steep (but not vertical)
 Angle  grade direction (compass degrees)
Range:  0° (North) to ±359°
a negative value reverses the grade direction


PencilTips.PNG You can copy the current Ground Height of any spot in the route to the  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Using the Eyedropper option found in any brush tool
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG move the mouse pointer onto the spot on the terrain
DotPoint2.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click
OR
Bblue.png Using the  Height  setting and the compass
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click onto the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG Right Click inside the  Height  setting entry box
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the menu option
 Get Height at Compass 
OR
Cblue.png Using the Compass and the Info Palette
  Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click at the spot on the terrain to move the Compass
DotPoint2.JPG open the Focus controls in the Info Palette
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click the  z  control down arrowhead icon
DotPoint4.JPG select the menu option
 Use Height for Brush 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to set an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, to a specific height then the Marquee Tool would be a better choice.
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (a cliff) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.
 
Steps: To set the Ground Surface Height:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint2.JPG select the brush Target (in this case  Ground Height )
DotPoint3.JPG select the brush Action ( Height Up ,  Height Down , etc)
DotPoint4.JPG set any brush controls ( Radius , Height ,  Sensitivity , etc) in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to change the terrain height


Ground Height Object Context Menu Options
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific Ground Height Options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu of the object.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the ground under the selected objects to match the set height of the objects. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object. This option is frequently used to raise and smooth the ground under track splines.
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected objects to match the height of the ground beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting


Ground Texture

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This tool paints the currently selected Ground Texture (from the Assets Palette) on the ground
This brush tool uses the Tool Options Palette and the Assets Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.

When the  Ground Texture  Target is selected, the second drop down box will be disabled - there are no brush texture actions.

PencilTips.PNG The active texture brush options are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


Texture brush options
 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Sensitivity  texture transparency
Range:  1% = almost transparent to
  100% = solid (opaque)
 Rotation  initial rotation angle - see Notes: below
Range:  0° to ±360° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the texture pattern scaling factor as a %
Range:  0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, >100% larger than full size
Steps: To paint a Ground Texture:-
DotPoint1.JPG select your Ground Texture in the Assets Palette - you can use the Assets Palette filter options to narrow down the selection
DotPoint2.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Ground Texture  target from the Brush Tool drop down menu
DotPoint4.JPG set any brush controls ( Radius ,  Sensitivity ,  Rotation ,  Scale ) in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint with the texture
NotePad.PNG The  Height  setting has no effect on textures as they are always painted on the existing ground surface.


PencilTips.PNG You can identify and select an existing Ground Texture to use elsewhere in the route by:-

Steps:

DotPoint1.JPG Hold down the  Alt  key and move the pointer onto the texture to be selected. Its name will appear in the pointer ToolTip
DotPoint2.JPG While holding down the  Alt  key Left Click on the texture
The texture will be selected in the Assets Palette and the Ground Texture target in the Brush Tool will be activated so you can immediately start painting with the texture using the current Tool Options Palette settings


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases. If you are using the brush to paint an entire baseboard, or many baseboards, then the Marquee Tool will be quicker but it will not give the options of changing the scale and rotation while painting the texture.
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  controls the starting angle for the texture when painting and is often used to avoid pattern repetition. As in Surveyor Classic, holding down the  [  or  ]  keys while painting will continuously change the rotation angle
Stop.PNG Warning: Changing the rotation angle during painting is not recommended for PBR Textures as this will significantly increase the memory useage (each rotation will load in another copy of the PBR texture).


Ground Texture Object Context Menu Option
Once an object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific Ground Texture Option, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu of the object.
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out. This option is frequently used to paint a texture under selected track (or other) splines.


 Default Baseboard Ground Texture 

When a new route is created or a new baseboard is added it will be covered with the ground texture for the selected Region or the default texture if no region has been set. This can be changed to a different texture (including to the standard TRS19/TRS22 grid pattern).
MainMenuSetGroundTexture.png
The easiest option is to disable the current default ground texture
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG open the SurveyorDisplayIcon.png Surveyor Display Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Ground  option
DotPoint3.JPG select the  Grid  sub-option. This will use the current grid texture.
A more complex solution is to edit an existing Region or create one of your own to add your preferred ground texture (such as the standard TRS22 grid pattern) to each new route you create and every new baseboard that you add.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Baseboard Ground Texture, chosen from the Surveyor Display Menu or by specifying a Region, will become the default for every new route you create, until you change it to something else


LinkWiki.PNG

Information on creating and editing Region assets can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Create a Region Asset


Scrapbook Data

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This tool paints the currently selected Scrapbook (from the Scrapbook Palette) on the ground
This brush tool uses both the Tool Options Palette and the Scrapbook Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document. Instructions on how to create Scrapbooks can be found in the PageLink.PNG Marquee Tool section of this document.


PencilTips.PNG A new scrapbook can be created by choosing one of the following:-

Options:

Ablue.png use the PageLink.PNG Marquee Tool to select an area of the route containing objects, OR
Bblue.png use the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool or the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool to select a group of individual objects for the scrapbook
In both cases once the area or objects have been selected use the Context Menu  Cut  or  Copy  options to place the objects into a new scrapbook.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
 But NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in PageLink.PNG The Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.


PencilTips.PNG
The current Scrapbook can be Pasted into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the Compass Rose) by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press  Ctrl  +  V , OR
Bblue.png selecting  Paste  from the Context Menu of a selected object
In both cases the Scrapbook will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a Marquee Selection Area that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current Scrapbook Palette filter settings


 The Scrapbook Brush Actions 

When the  Scrapbook Data  Target is selected, the second drop down box will give a choice of two brush actions that control how the scrapbook is applied.

The actions are:-
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Brush
BulletTick.png Scrapbook Clone
BrushToolsScrapbookOptions S20.png
Scrapbook Brush Actions:
 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size

 Scrapbook Clone  will paint the scrapbook sized according to the Tool Options Palette  Scale  setting. See Notes below


NotePad.PNG Notes:

 Scrapbook Brush  will resize the scrapbook contents to fit the selected brush shape and size.
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is small then the scrapbook contents will be compressed closer together
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is large then the contents will be spaced further apart
DotPoint.JPG Every Left Click will paste another complete scrapbook copy
DotPoint.JPG The  Scale  setting in the Tool Options Palette is ignored.
 Scrapbook Clone  will paste the scrapbook sized according to the  Scale  setting (100% = original size)
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is the same size as the scaled scrapbook then a single exact copy will be pasted
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is smaller than the scaled scrapbook in size then only the central part of the scrapbook will be revealed and more will be added when the brush is moved around until the "painted" area covers the same area as the scaled scrapbook. Further painting will clone or tile the scrapbook contents
DotPoint.JPG If the brush is larger than the scaled scrapbook in size then the contents will be cloned or tiled to fill the set brush radius
 
Stop.PNG WARNING:

Take care if setting both the  Scale  and the  Radius . Using extreme values for both, such as a very large brush radius and a very small scale value, can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents


PencilTips.PNG The active scrapbook brush options are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 Scrapbook Brush 
Brush options
 Scrapbook Clone 
Clone options

 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  5m and above
 Sensitivity  if the  Ground Height  option has been enabled in the Scrapbook Palette filter settings, then this will set the rate or speed at which the ground height will change
Range:  1% = slowest, 100% = fastest
 Rotation  initial rotation angle (degrees) - see Notes: below
Range:  0° to ±360° (larger angles can be entered)
 Scale  the scrapbook scaling factor
Range:  0.01% = smallest, 100% = full size, >100% larger than full size
 Shape  brush shape
Options:  BrushToolsScrapShapes S20.png  Circle  and  Square  will set the brush to the selected shape with the  Radius  setting the brush size
   Natural  will set the brush to the same shape as the Marquee that created the scrapbook, which may be rectangular. The  Radius  setting will scale the brush size


NotePad.PNG The Tool Options Palette  Height  setting has no effect on the Scrapbook. This feature is controlled by the Scrapbook Palette Filter  Ground Height  options.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases.
DotPoint.JPG The  Rotation  controls the starting angle for pasting the scrapbook objects. In Surveyor Classic you could only rotate and paste in 90° increments. In S20 you can rotate and paste at any angle.
DotPoint.JPG The  Ground Height  options in the Scrapbook Filters control how the terrain heights in the Scrapbook are applied
DotPoint.JPG Setting extreme values for the  Scale  and the  Radius  when using the  Scrapbook Data Clone Brush  can cause performance issues (i.e. long delays) while the program attempts to scale and clone the scrapbook contents into the route
 
Steps: To "paint" with a Scrapbook asset:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Scrapbook Data  target from the Brush Tool first drop down menu
DotPoint3.JPG select a brush action ( Scrapbook Brush  or  Scrapbook Clone ) from the Brush Tool second drop down menu
DotPoint4.JPG select a Scrapbook asset to be painted (see the The Scrapbook Palette below)
DotPoint5.JPG open the Scrapbook Filter in the Scrapbook Palette and select the features to be pasted and their method of pasting (see The Scrapbook Filters below)
DotPoint6.JPG set any Brush controls (e.g.  Radius ) from the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint7.JPG Left Click or Left Click and Drag (depending on your brush settings) on the terrain to paint with the scrapbook asset


 The Scrapbook Palette 

ScrapbookToolsTop S20.png
ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.pngScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png Left Click on the pin icon to Lock (blue pin) and Unlock (white pin) the scrapbook. Locked scrapbooks are permanent (but can still be deleted). Unlocked scrapbooks will "expire" (self delete) after 5 days
DeleteIcon S20.png Left Click on the delete icon to delete the current scrapbook - most scrapbooks can be deleted (see Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks below on how to deal with the exceptions to this)
ScrapbookThumbnail S20.png The thumbnail of the currently displayed scrapbook and the one that will be painted or pasted into the route
ScrapbookCounter S20.png Identifies the currently displayed scrapbook (the first number) and the total number of stored scrapbooks (the second number)
ScrapbookLeftRight S20.png Left Click on the  <  or  >  to move forwards or backwards through the stored scrapbooks to select the scrapbook that will be added to the route
  The scrapbook name can be edited. Left Click inside the name box to edit or replace the current name. Left Click on the image to make the name change permanent and pin (lock) the scrapbook (pressing the  Enter  key does not work - a known bug)


NotePad.PNG Notes: Deleting Built-in Scrapbooks

Some scrapbooks are installed with Trainz and cannot be deleted. These scrapbooks have the label Prefab at the front of their names (you may have to scroll to the front of the name to see it). While they cannot be deleted they can be "disabled" so that they won't appear as an installed scrapbook. Unlocking them will not cause them to "expire" - after 5 days they will just become locked again.
Steps: To disable built-in scrapbooks
DotPoint1.JPG Open Content Manager and locate the "permanent" scrapbook or scrapbooks.
Search Tips: Name: starts with "Prefab"; Status: is Built-in; Type: is Misc
DotPoint2.JPG Highlight (select) the Scrapbook assets
DotPoint3.JPG Open the Content menu and select the  Disable  option
You can reverse this and enable any or all of these scrapbooks later if you need them.


 The Scrapbook Filters 

PencilTips.PNG You will probably need to undock and resize the Scrapbook palette to make full use of its filters. See the Trainz Wiki page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for undocking and resizing instructions


To Open the Scrapbook Filters:
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the arrowhead next to the  Filters:  label below the scrapbook image to open the scrapbook filters.
These filters control which elements in the scrapbook are added to the route and how they are added.


ScrapbookToolsBottom S20.png


PencilTips.PNG You can vary the appearance of the scrapbook when added to a route by painting or pasting it with different filter combinations. For Example:-
 Ground Height:   None  ground height data will not be pasted and the ground heights already in the target area will be used
 Ground Texture:  Overwrite  textures present in the scrapbook will replace those already in the target area
 Meshes:  Add  scenery objects in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Splines:  Add  scenery splines in the scrapbook will be added to those already in the target area
 Effect Layers:   None  effect layers in the scrapbook will not be pasted and any already in the target area will be used
PencilTips.PNG You can also add more variety when painting a Scrapbook by changing its Tool Options Palette  Scale  and  Rotation  settings in combination with different Filter selections (as shown above)
 Scrapbook Painting/Pasting Options 
 What Data to Transfer 
    Ground Height  terrain height(s) used in the scrapbook
    Texture  textures used in the scrapbook
    Meshes  scenery objects (e.g. trees, buildings) used in the scrapbook
    Splines  spline objects used in the scrapbook
    Effect Layers  effect layers (TurfFX, Clutter, Water Layer) used in the scrapbook
 How to Transfer the Data
    None  do not paste/paint this feature
    Add  add this feature to those already present
    Overwrite  use this feature to replace those already present
For the Ground Height:-
    None  do not paste/paint the scrapbook ground heights, use the existing ground heights instead
    Absolute  use the ground heights in the scrapbook to replace the existing ground heights
    Relative  use the difference between the existing ground heights and those used in the scrapbook


PencilTips.PNG
The current Scrapbook can be Pasted into a route at the position of the screen cursor (the Compass Rose) by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png press  Ctrl  +  V , OR
Bblue.png selecting  Paste  from the Context Menu of a selected object
In both cases the Scrapbook will be pasted using the original scrapbooks size. It will be pasted inside a Marquee Selection Area that can be moved and resized. The objects that are pasted and how they are pasted is controlled by the current Scrapbook Palette filter settings


Effect Layers

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png This tool paints a selected Effect Layer onto the ground surface
BlueDot10x10.png If the route has Effect Layers installed then they will be listed individually as additional Targets.
This brush tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


BrushToolsPresets S20.png
Step:
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on an Effect Layer name in the Brush Target List and immediately start painting with the brush using the current Tool Options Palette settings. More details are shown below.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers are created using the Edit Effect Layers options found in both the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu at the top of the screen and also in the Brush Tools drop down list. They can also be loaded from .CDP files and installed from the Download Station (DLS).
DotPoint.JPG Once installed or created, Effect Layers can be added to a route as presets using either of the Edit Effect Layers options.


AssetsPaletteEffectLayers S20.png
PencilTips.PNG You can also select an Effect Layer from the Assets Palette filter list. This will also add the Effect Layer into the Brush Target List.


Step:
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on an effect layer name in the Assets Palette and immediately start painting using the current Brush Tool Options Palette settings. More details are shown below.


PencilTips.PNG The effect layer brush options are shown in the Tool Options Palette with a  Gold  coloured icon next to their names. Those options that have their icon greyed out will be ignored by the selected action, but they can still be edited.


Most of the data entry boxes in the Tool Options Palette have a Popup Menu (Right Click inside the box) that can be used to collect and distribute data - see the Wiki Page WikiLink.PNG How to Use Surveyor the 2.0 Palettes for more details.


 TurfFX and Clutter 
BrushToolsEffectLayer S20.png
 Water 
BrushToolsWaterLayer S20.png
 Radius  the brush radius (metres) - see Notes: below
Range:  see Notes: below
 Height  the water layer height (metres)
Range:  -3000m to +3000m
 Sensitivity  the rate at which the Intensity (TurfFX, Clutter) or Height (Water) setting changes
Range:  1% (very slowly) to 100% (very quickly)
 Intensity  effect density or coverage within the brush
Range:  1% (almost none) to 100% (maximum)
NotePad.PNG The  Height  setting is ignored for TurfFX and Clutter because these effect layers will be painted at the existing ground surface height. For an exception, see Notes: Floating Turf below.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Unlike Surveyor Classic, there is no upper limit to the brush  Radius . Brushes of hundreds of metres (even kilometres) in size are possible. However, the performance will decrease as the brush radius increases
DotPoint.JPG The minimum brush  Radius  will depend on the configuration settings (asset density, resources used, etc) of the Effect Layer that is being painted. If the  Radius  setting is below the minimum then the brush circle will turn red and it will not paint


 TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layers 

When a TurfFX or Clutter Effect Layer has been selected as the Target, the second drop down box will give a choice of three actions.
The actions are very similar to those found in the  Ground Height  Target:-
BulletTick.png Increase
BulletTick.png Decrease
BulletTick.png Set Intensity
EffectLayerActions S20.png
TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layer Actions:
 Increase  increases the Tool Options Palette  Intensity  of the effect layer at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting, upto a maximum of 100%, as the brush is swept back and forth over an area
 
 Decrease  decreases the Tool Options Palette  Intensity  of the effect layer at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting as the brush is swept back and forth over an area
 
 Set Intensity  will paint the effect layer in one sweep using the full Tool Options Palette  Intensity  setting


Steps: To paint with an Effect Layer
DotPoint1.JPG select the Brush Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  W  key)
DotPoint2.JPG select the <effect layer name> from the Brush Target drop down menu. If there are no Effect Layers listed then none have been created or installed
DotPoint3.JPG select a Brush action from the second drop down list ( Increase ,  Decrease  or  Set Intensity )
DotPoint4.JPG set any required Brush settings -  Radius ,  Intensity  and  Sensitivity  - from the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint5.JPG Left Click or Left Click and Drag on the terrain to paint with the Effect Layer


NotePad.PNG Notes: "Floating Turf"
When painting with an Effect Layer brush, care must be taken when near the edge of the route. Painting over the edge will create "floating" effect layer artifacts. This can occur in both Surveyor 2.0 and Surveyor Classic.
EffectLayerHeightArtifact.png In the image on the left, an Effect Layer brush has been used to paint a TurfFX layer near the boundary of the route. Some of the brush has strayed over that boundary edge into the empty space beyond.

The result is a "floating" section of TurfFX or Clutter hovering "off the grid" and sometimes high above the terrain, as shown in the image. The height of the floating region will depend on the ground surface height, the World Origin height and other mysterious factors.

The Solution: (The Lawn Mower)
DotPoint1.JPG Set the Effect Brush Tool action to  Decrease 
DotPoint2.JPG Set both the  Intensity  and  Sensitivity  to 100%
DotPoint3.JPG Using the same Effect Layer that created the problem, repaint over the floating Effect Layer areas. This will also remove some of the effect layer from the edges of the boundary baseboards.
Prevention:
DO NOT paint TurfFX and Clutter Effect Layers right up to the edges of boundary baseboards


 Water Effect Layer 

BlueDot10x10.png A Water Effect Layer will cover the entire route. Use the Ground Height Brush to raise or lower the ground to hide and reveal the water where required


When a Water Effect Layer has been selected as theTarget, the second drop down box will give a choice of five actions.
The actions are identical to those found in the  Ground Height  Target plus a new action:-
BulletTick.png Height Up
BulletTick.png Height Down
BulletTick.png Set Height
BulletTick.png Grade
BulletTick.png Bulk Adjust
BrushToolsWaterEffect S20.png
Water Effect Layer Actions:
 Height Up 
 Height Down 
raises/lowers the water layer at a rate controlled by the Tool Options Palette  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Set Height  will "plateau" the water level to the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting
 
 Grade  creates a smooth water slope at the Tool Options Palette  Grade  and  Angle  settings at a rate controlled by the  Sensitivity  setting - see Notes: below
 
 Bulk Adjust  will move the entire water layer up or down - see Notes: below


PencilTips.PNG Water Laying:
DotPoint.JPG To create a flat water layer use  Set Height  rather than  Height Up/Height Down  and set the Tool Options Palette  Sensitivity  to 100%
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  action can be used to create a river that slowly (or rapidly) falls over a set distance


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG It is NOT recommended that you use both Water Effect Layers and the original Legacy Water in the same route. Use one or the other but, where possible, avoid using both.
DotPoint.JPG The  Grade  setting is the vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a slope formed by the height and distance both being the same value (e.g. a height increase of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical slope (e.g. a waterfall) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.
DotPoint.JPG The  Bulk Adjust  action is not fully intuitive and will require some experimentation. It will raise and lower the water effect layer in the baseboard where the Left Click and Drag was executed. Areas within that baseboard where the water effect layer had previously been set to a different height will not be affected until the water level reaches the same height. The Water Effect Layer in surrounding baseboards will also start to move when the level reaches their current heights.


Edit Effect Layers...

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

When this Target is selected, the Edit Effect Layer dialogue box will appear. This is the same as selecting  Edit Effect Layers ...  from the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu.

Open effect layers Options:

Ablue.png If no Effect Layers are present then you can create a new one

New effect layer

Bblue.png If Effect Layers are present then select one to edit

Edit effect layers


PencilTips.PNG Effect Layers are created for each route. You can select and edit a previously saved Effect Layer rather than having to recreate the entire effect each time.


LinkWiki.PNG

More information on creating and editing Effect Layers can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

TurfFX_Effect_Layer
Clutter_Effect_Layer
Water_Effect_Layer


The Placement Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom


S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  E  The  Placement Tool  adds objects to a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette and the Assets Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


PencilTips.PNG When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easier to identify that the Placement Tool is active PlacementToolPointer S20.png


The Placement Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Placement Tools
PencilTips.PNG More Placement Options
After an object has been placed in a route its position and/or height can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png using the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Cblue.png editing its  x   y   z  settings in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Dblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu

The first step is to identify and select the particular object that you want to add to the route.

Placing a Scenery Mesh Object

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.
Steps: To add a Scenery Mesh Object the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add. Steps DotPoint1.JPG, DotPoint2.JPG and DotPoint3.JPG are common to placing ALL types of objects but the selection of the object in step DotPoint1.JPG will change for different types of objects.


DotPoint1.JPG In the Asset Palette choose one of the following:-

Options:
Left Click on an asset selection icon

Filter Icons

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
Left Click the Content Drop-down Box

Filter List
Then select Scenery Objects
Scenery Objects

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1Blue.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a ToolTip attached to the pointer
DotPoint2Blue.png while holding down the  Alt  key Left Click on the object to identify it in the Assets Palette and automatically select it for placement with the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below (for a Scenery Mesh Object) or to Step DotPoint4.JPG in one of the sections below (for a different type of object).
DotPoint2.JPG Optional: To narrow down the filter list type part of the object name into the Search Text Box. For example if you have selected Scenery Objects and want to find "barns", then type "barn" (UPPER/lower case does not matter).
Text search This will list all the Scenery Objects containing the text "barn" in their name or description.
Filtered list DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the required item in the list.

When selected the object will be highlighted on a blue background and its name will appear in the Assets Palette title bar.

PencilTips.PNG
If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View (best used when the palette is undocked and enlarged).
See the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details


PencilTips.PNG A Left Click on an object in the Assets Palette filter list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next Left Click in the route will place that object in the route.


DotPoint4.JPG The final step is to place the selected object into the route.
Steps:
DotPoint1Blue.png if the Placement Tool is not selected then Left Click it or press the  E  key
DotPoint2Blue.png Left Click on the spot where you want to place the object
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you Left Click another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool


Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu Options

Once a scenery mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu.


 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
See PageLink.PNG Mesh Object Context Menu for more details.


 Moving Scenery Mesh Objects 

Once an scenery mesh object has been added to a route its height can be changed with the Placement Tool.
DotPoint.JPG See PageLink.PNG Placement Tool Options below.
It can also be easily deleted.
DotPoint.JPG See PageLink.PNG Deleting Placed Objects below.
But to move most placed objects (Track Objects and Rolling Stock Objects are exceptions - see below) you must switch to one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png PageLink.PNG The Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png PageLink.PNG The Fine Ajustment Tool


Placing a Scenery or Track Spline

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.


Steps: Start the process of laying a track or spline by identifying and selecting the track or scenery spline as described in steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Scenery Spline or the Track filter in the Assets Palette
Options:
Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png spline scenery assets OR TrackSplineFilter S20.png track spline assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Scenery Splines  OR  Track 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementTrack1 S20.png DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the spot where the spline will start. This will place the start or first endpoint of the spline.
DotPoint5.JPG Move the mouse in the direction you want to lay the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
PlacementTrack2 S20.png DotPoint6.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the first spline segment, Left Click again. This will anchor the second spline endpoint. The spline between the two endpoints is the first spline segment.


The spline segment will now have three Context Icons, one for each endpoint and one for the spline segment.

PencilTips.PNG Different context menu options are provided depending on which icon you Left Click on
PlacementTrack3 S20.png DotPoint7.JPG Left Click on the new endpoint and move the mouse in the direction you want to continue laying the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
NotePad.PNG Notes: Curves for Trainz Geeks

Splines and track splines are created and stored using Bezier Curves, a mathematical formula commonly used for curves in computer graphics. Each spline segment, curved or straight, is described using just 4 points regardless of its length and complexity. This gives significant savings in storage and processing. Unfortunately, real world curves are rarely described by simple Bezier Curves. This can sometimes create difficulties when modelling curves from the real world so approximations often have to be used in the Trainz World.
PlacementTrack4 S20.png DotPoint8.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the second spline segment, Left Click again. This will anchor the third spline endpoint and the Context Icons will move to the new segment.
PencilTips.PNG Adding a Junction and Editing
DotPoint.JPG To add a junction to a spline segment Left Click on it with the Placement Tool at the point where you want to insert the junction, including at an endpoint. Then move the mouse to draw out the new spline segment.
DotPoint.JPG To edit a spline segment  DO NOT  click on it with the Placement Tool as this will insert a junction. Select the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool and then Left Click on the segment to be edited.
Repeat Steps DotPoint7.JPG and DotPoint8.JPG above to continue laying the spline.


Spline Object Context Menu Options

Once a spline object has been placed you can open either of its two Context Menus - one for the spline segment and one for the endpoints (Left Click on one of its icons or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu (the exact menu will depend on whether a segment or an endpoint was selected).


 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
See PageLink.PNG Spline Object Context Menu for more details.


 Spline Heights 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used

When you start adding a spline to a route it will always be placed at the height of the terrain regardless of the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting.

However, you can set the heights of any selected segment or endpoint.

To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) the  Apply Height  option, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Placing Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (e.g. signals, speed signs, switches, etc), both visible and invisible, can only be attached to track splines.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Visible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Signals, speed signs, end buffers, switches
Invisible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Trackmarks, triggers, direction and priority markers


Steps: Follow steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Track Object filter in the Assets Palette.
Options:

Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
TrackMeshFilter S20.png track (non spline) assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Track Objects 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementTrackObject S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the track at the position where you want the Track Object to be placed.

Once it has been placed it can be moved, Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot in the middle of the track) to any position along the track or to another track.

PencilTips.PNG Moving Track Objects can also be performed, with more control and additional options, using the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool.


Track Mesh Object Context Menu Options
Once a track mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. One or both of the following specific options will appear, amongst others, in the popup Context Menu.
 Rotate Trackside  swaps the position of the object to the other side of the track so that it faces the opposite direction
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch or junction then its switch direction will be reversed
See PageLink.PNG Track Object Context Menu for more details.


Placing Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (e.g. locomotives, passenger cars and wagons) can only be attached to track splines.


Steps: Follow steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Rolling Stock filter in the Assets Palette.
Options:

Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
TrainFilter S20.png rolling stock assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Rolling Stock 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementRollingStockObject S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the track at the position where you want the Rolling Stock Object to be placed.

Once it has been placed it can be moved, Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot) to any position along the track or to another track. It can also be coupled to a consist and then decoupled by dragging the same Anchor Point.

PencilTips.PNG Moving, coupling and decoupling Rolling Stock Objects can also be performed, with more control, using the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool.


Rolling Stock Object Context Menu Options
Once a rolling stock object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu.
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
See PageLink.PNG Rolling Stock Object Context Menu for more details.


Placement Tool Options

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
NotePad.PNG Notes:

 
DotPoint.JPG These options do not apply to Rolling Stock Objects
DotPoint.JPG To use the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting with the Placement Tool a value must be entered followed by the  Enter  key OR select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to use the current setting. This must be performed after the object has been been placed.


 Placement Mesh Object Height Options 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


PlacementMeshHeight0 S20.png PlacementMeshHeight3 S20.png

In Surveyor 2.0 track objects as well as scenery mesh objects can be given a height - in the case of track objects the height is above (or below) the track.

To set the height of a selected scenery or track mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Bblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).
The object will be moved to the set height above (or below) the terrain. The vertical yellow line shown in the second image on the left indicates the height change. The small yellow dot at the base of the line is the terrain attachment point for the object.


 Placement Spline (and Track) Options 


Splines have two Placement Tool settings in the Tool Options Palette.

PlacementSplineTools S20.png
 Grade  spline gradient (see Notes: below). The finishing endpoint of each spline segment will be set higher (for a positive grade) or lower (for a negative grade) than the starting endpoint
Range:  0% (flat) to ±100% (steep but not vertical)
PencilTips.PNG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on a track or spline segment to copy the Grade value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments.
 Condition  this applies to Track Spline objects and sets the track condition (or "ride comfort") for each segment
Range:  1% (terrible track condition) to 100% (perfect track condition)
PencilTips.PNGThe Track Condition can also be set for each track segment in its Context Menu  Edit Properties  option


PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical grade (such as up a cliff face) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Deleting Placed Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
Steps: To delete objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG
Select the object or a group of objects by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Free Move Tool (or press  S ) OR
Bblue.png Fine Adjustment Tool (or press  D )
  Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the  Shift  key when using these tools
Then ..
DotPoint2.JPG
Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png Open the Context Menu of the object (or object group) and select the  Delete  option
PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG You can also use the Marquee Tool to select an area of the route to delete its objects
DotPoint.JPG With these tools (Free Move, Fine Adjustment and Marquee) you can restrict the objects that can be selected and deleted by using filters in the Assets Palette. For more information see PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search in the Eyedropper Tool section below


The Eyedropper Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 DropperToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  R  The  Eyedropper Tool  identifies and selects objects in a Trainz World
This tool uses the Assets Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


PencilTips.PNGWhen selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easy to identify that the Eyedropper Tool is active EyedropperToolPointer S20.png


The Eyedropper Tool has no drop down menu lists.

PencilTips.PNGAn Eyedropper is inside all the tools so you can quickly identify any object without having to switch to the Eyedropper Tool and back again.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the pointer tool onto an object to reveal its name as a ToolTip
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on an object to select it in the Assets Palette list
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the terrain to copy the Height value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting. That value can then be used to set the brush Height for other terrain areas
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on a track or spline segment to copy the Grade value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments


Eyedropper Tools When selected, the Eyedropper Tool will change the tool pointer to an "eyedropper" icon.


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG move the eyedropper pointer over any object to reveal its name in a  ToolTip  below the pointer
DotPoint.JPG hold the eyedropper over any object for a few seconds to reveal more information
DotPoint.JPG Left Click on an object to select it in the Assets Palette


Quick Steps

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

DotPoint1.JPG With the Eyedropper Tool selected, move the tool pointer (which will now be an eyedropper symbol) onto any object in view.

Eyedropper
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the object to identify it (highlighted in grey) in the Assets Palette filter list AssetFilterNameHighlighted S20.png
Asset filter set by the Eyedropper in S20


DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the object name in the Assets Palette filter list to select it (highlighted in blue) and switch control to the Placement Tool so the next Left Click in the route will place the selected object in the route.

AssetFilterNameSelected S20.png


Narrowing the Search

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Sometimes (or often) a scene will be too crowded with different scenery objects to be able to use the Eyedropper Tool to easily select a single object. In these cases additional options are available to help "remove the clutter".
PencilTips.PNGThese filter options can be used with the Placement Tool, Free Move Tool, Fine Adjustment Tool and the Marquee Tool as well as with the Eyedropper Tool


At the top of the Assets Palette is a drop down box which controls how the Tool works with the filters that you set.

Assets palette The drop down box will provide three options:-
BulletTick.png Filter List
BulletTick.png Filter Selection
BulletTick.png Filter Visibility
AssetsPaletteFilterOptions S20.png


These options work with the Asset Filters to help narrow the search for a specific object or type of object that is in the route.

Asset Filter Options:
 Filter List  this option will have no effect on the operation of the Tool or on the objects displayed on the screen. It is the default setting and any selections made with the Tool will be shown in the Assets Palette as described in the section Quick Steps above.
 Filter Selection  this option will restrict the Tool to only working on those objects that are in the filtered list. Objects that are not in the filtered list cannot be selected.
 Filter Visibility  this option will hide all objects that are not in the filtered list. The only exceptions are Ground Textures and Effect Layers which will be visible but, unless they are also in the filtered list, cannot be selected.

As an example the following images show the progressive application of a Visibility Filter.

AssetFilterScene1 S20.png AssestFilteredScene1.png DotPoint1Blue.png No filter has been applied.


All the objects are visible on the Surveyor screen.

ALL objects can be selected.

AssetFilterScene2 S20.png AssestFilteredScene2.png

DotPoint2Blue.png The Visibility Filter option has been applied and the filtered list has been set to display only Scenery Splines.

All objects except Scenery Splines, Ground Textures and Effect Layers are now hidden.

Now only Scenery Splines can be selected.

AssetFilterScene3 S20.png AssestFilteredScene3.png

DotPoint3Blue.png An additional filter has been applied. The word "fence" has been added to the search text box.

All Scenery Splines that do not have the text "fence" in their names or descriptions have now been hidden.

Now only the remaining visible Scenery Splines can be selected.


The Free Move Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  S  The  Free Move Tool  moves objects around a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Free Move Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Free Move Tools
PencilTips.PNGFree Move Alternatives
In addition to the Free Move Tool the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Bblue.png editing its  x   y   z  values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.

 Free Move: Move a Mesh Object 

FreeMoveToolCar S20.png
Steps: To move a Scenery Mesh Object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool (or press the  S  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object in any horizontal direction


NotePad.PNG When moving a scenery object, its height will be fixed to the terrain height.


 Free Move: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  setting from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Free Move: Mesh Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. Left Click on the icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If no object has been selected in the Assets Palette or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


Free Move: Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track

 Free Move: Move a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track
FreeMoveTrackObject S20.png
Step: To move a track object horizontally:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the object anywhere in the horizontal plane including away from the track

FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png


PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see the next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track

Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally.

 Free Move: Set the Height of a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
Throw Lever track object level with the track
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .
FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png
After being moved vertically
PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting

 Free Move: Track Object Context Menu 

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context menuchoose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select  in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.

FreeMoveTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu (Left Click the icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.
Moving a spline can involve moving one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png a segment, OR
Cblue.png multiple segments including the whole length of the spline


 Free Move: Move Spline Endpoints 

FreeMoveToolSpline S20.png
Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected spline endpoint in any horizontal direction
Active (selected) endpoints are shown as green. Inactive spline endpoints are shown as black


NotePad.PNG The spline endpoint will be fixed at its original height.


 Free Move: Move Spline Segments 

Splines are frequently made of multiple segments joined together. You can easily move a spline by moving its segments, individually or as a group.

spline made of 3 joined segments
NotePad.PNG Not all splines have endpoints at each ends. As shown in the image on the left, some splines will have an "endcap" that is attached to the start of the first segment and to the end of the last segment. The use of an endcap is a purely cosmetic effect - to give the spline a more distinctive appearance.


FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelected S20.png
Steps: To move an individual segment or multiple segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the spline segment to be moved - click anywhere between the two spline endpoints on the segment
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the selected segment will be highlighted in green/yellow.
DotPoint.JPG The segment will have a temporary endpoint inserted at the location you clicked.


PencilTips.PNGTemporary spline endpoints can be made permanent by selecting the  Insert Spline Point Here  option from the segment Context Menu


FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelected S20.png
IF you are going to select and move more than one spline segment, then:-
DotPoint3.JPG hold the  Shift  key down and individually Left Click between the endpoints on each additional segment.


The last segment that you Left Click will have the temporary endpoint and Context Icons added.
PencilTips.PNGTo select ALL the segments in a spline, Double Left Click on a segment

If the spline contains a junction then this will only select all the segments upto the junction point

The segment that you double-clicked will have the temporary endpoint and Context Icons added.
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected segment(s) in any horizontal direction.
If you had selected:-
DotPoint.JPG only a single spline segment then only that segment will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will have their shapes (but not their endpoints) adjusted
DotPoint.JPG multiple spline segments then those segments will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will also have their shapes adjusted
DotPoint.JPG the entire spline then ALL the segments and endpoints will be moved
FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelectedMoved S20.png FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelectedMoved S20.png


 Free Move: Set Spline Height 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png firstly select the spline segment or endpoint and then Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Free Move: Spline Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

ContextIconsSpline S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:
Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


To open a selected objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


SplineEndPointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineObject S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png


 Cut  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Copy  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the Tool Options Palette.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected spline


Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.

 Free Move: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

Use the Free Move tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FreeMoveRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".
This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.
PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png
The simple solution is to use the Free Move Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.


 Free Move: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  + Left Click on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one (Left Click) or more ( Shift  + Left Click) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


 Free Move: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select (Left Click) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  + Left Click to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  + Left Click, on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu by choosing one of the following:-

Options:
Ablue.png Left Click on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR
Bblue.png press the  T  key

DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1Blue.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2Blue.png Context Icon on the Guard Van
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png

Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


 Free Move: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected rolling stock object's Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock.
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected rolling stock object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object


The Fine Adjustment Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  D  The  Fine Adjustment Tool  makes 3D adjustments (position and rotations) to objects in a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Fine Adjustment Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Fine Adjustment Tools
PencilTips.PNGFine Adjustment Alternatives
In addition to the Fine Adjustment Tool the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool
Bblue.png editing its  x   y   z   r   p   y  values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


BlueDot10x10.png The most obvious feature of the Fine Adjustment Tool is the 3D Anchor Frame it adds to a selected object. The frame is made of 3 straight and 3 curved coloured lines, called Anchors, which control the position and orientation of an object or a group of objects.
FineAdjust3DFrame S20.png The Anchor controls are:-
 The Horizontal and Vertical Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  move the object (forward/back or up/down) in the direction of the Anchor line
 The Rotational Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  rotate the object (clockwise and anti-clockwise) along the Anchor Arc Line centred around the Anchor Straight Line of the same colour
NotePad.PNG Not all objects will have  Red  and/or  Green  rotational Anchors.
 The Object Anchor 
     (black central dot) moves the object in any horizontal direction
NotePad.PNG The orientation of the  Red  and  Green  horizontal anchor lines is based on the orientation of the object when it is placed in the scene, not on the compass directions
Steps: To use the Fine Adjustment Tool controls:-
DotPoint1.JPG move the tool pointer onto an Anchor - its colour will change to yellow for Anchor lines or green for the Object Anchor
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the Object Anchor in any direction or move the pointer along the chosen Anchor Line in the required direction (e.g. up on the blue vertical Anchor or clockwise around the arc of the red rotational Anchor)


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving anchors, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  x   y   z  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object  Pos:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below), OR
Cblue.png use the  r   p   y  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object  Rot:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the rotation to accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.

 Fine Adjustment: Move a Mesh Object 

To move an object with the Fine Adjustment Tool choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag anywhere on the selected object (except on an Anchor line) to move it freely in any horizontal direction
OR
Bblue.png Left Click and Drag on an Anchor line to move or rotate it in the direction of the line or arc
These operations can also be performed on a group of selected objects. The 3D Anchor Frame will be on the last object added to the group.


 Blue  vertical Anchor movement
FineAdjustZMove S20.png
   Green  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustYawMove S20.png
   Red  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustPitchMove S20.png
   Blue  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustRotateXYMove S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will have  Red  or  Green  Rotational Anchors
DotPoint.JPG Objects can be restored to their original height and rotation settings by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reset Object Rotation  to cancel the rotation changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change
DotPoint.JPG The  Randomise Object Rotation  option in the Context Menu only affects rotations around the vertical axis - the  Blue  Rotational Anchor.


 Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Scenery Mesh objects can be raised above and lowered below the ground level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Cblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Fine Adjustment: Mesh Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. Left Click on the icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If no object has been selected in the Assets Palette or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random  Blue  Rotation Anchor angle to each object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


Fine Adjustment: Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track

 Fine Adjustment: Move a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track
FineAdjustTrackObject S20.png
To move a track object horizontally, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png For movements along the track - Left Click and Drag:-
DotPoint.JPG anywhere within the object (except on an Anchor Line or Anchor Point), OR
DotPoint.JPG on the  Green  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line and track only)
Bblue.png For movements left or right of the track - Left Click and Drag
DotPoint.JPG on the  Red  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line only), OR
DotPoint.JPG on the Object Anchor (the black dot) to get unrestricted horizontal movement
For most track objects the Rotational Anchors have no effect
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally.

 Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png

Throw Lever track object level with track
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png

After being moved vertically
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Cblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Dblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .


NotePad.PNG For most track objects the Rotational Anchors have no effect


 Fine Adjustment: Track Object Context Menu 

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.

FineAdjustTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu (Left Click the icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.
To move a spline, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png moving an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png moving a segment, OR
Cblue.png moving multiple segments including the whole length of the spline


 Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Endpoints 

FineAdjustSplineEndPoint S20.png

The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline endpoint.

Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint2.JPG Select, Left Click on, the spline endpoint to be moved.
Note: only the horizontal  Red  and  Green  and the vertical  Blue  lines can be selected.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor to move the endpoint in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png the endpoint itself to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


 Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Segments 

NotePad.PNG The  Green  rotational Anchor CANNOT be used on Track splines


FineAdjustSplineSegment S20.png The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline segment.
Steps: To move spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint2.JPG Select, Left Click on, the spline segment to be moved.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
 
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor to move the endpoint in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png anywhere in a segment to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


PencilTips.PNG To select:-
DotPoint.JPG more than one segment -  Shift  + Left Click on each segment
DotPoint.JPG ALL the segments - Double Left Click on a segment. This will select segments in both directions from the segment clicked. If the spline contains a junction then this will only select the segments upto the junction point


FineAdjustSplineSegmentStraight S20.png Selecting a spline segment with the Fine Adjustment Tool will add a Temporary Endpoint at the point where the segment was clicked.


This will produce 3 Fine Adjustment Tool control frames, one at each end of the segment and one at the click point, as shown in the image on the left. The whole segment can be moved, as shown in the following images, by a Left Click and Drag anywhere within the segment.
FineAdjustSplineSegmentXYMove S20.png
Segment moved to the right along the  Red  horizontal Anchor line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentZMove S20.png
Segment moved up along the  Blue  vertical Anchor line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Green   Blue  straight anchor lines will move the whole segment along the direction of the line

FineAdjustSplineSegmentRotate S20.png
Segment rotated anti-clockwise around the  Blue  rotational Anchor arc line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentPitch S20.png
Segment rotated clockwise around the  Red  rotational Anchor arc line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Blue  curved anchor lines will rotate the whole segment around the axis of the same colour


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  line height change and a  Red  Anchor rotation can be cancelled at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Settle on Ground  option from the segments Context Menu
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  Anchor rotation can be straightened at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Straighten Spline  option from the segments Context Menu but this will not return the endpoints to their original positions


 Fine Adjustment: Set Spline Height 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the objects  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key, OR
Cblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) the  Apply Height  option, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Fine Adjustment: Spline Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
NotePad.PNG Notes:
Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


SplineEndPointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineObject S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png


 Cut  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Copy  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the Tool Options Palette.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint and merges the segments on both sides into one. Two segments can also be joined by selecting and deleting the endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected spline


Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.

 Fine Adjustment: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

Use the Fine Adjustment tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FineAdjustRollingStock S20.png
link- Despite their presence in the Fine Adjustment Tool 3D Anchor Frame the  Red   Green   Blue  Rotational Anchor lines and the  Blue  Vertical Anchor Line will NOT work on Rolling Stock Objects
link- The Object Anchor (the central dot) will move the selected rolling stock object or objects in any horizontal direction but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline
link- The  Green  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects along the track
link- The  Red  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects horizontally off the track but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline


NotePad.PNG Notes:

It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".

  PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.


The simple solution is to use the Fine Adjustment Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.


 Fine Adjustment: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  + Left Click on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one (Left Click) or more ( Shift  + Left Click) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


 Fine Adjustment: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select (Left Click) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  + Left Click to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  + Left Click, on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu by choosing one of the following:-

Options:
Ablue.png Left Click on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR
Bblue.png press the  T  key

DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1Blue.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2Blue.png Context Icon on the Guard Van
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png

Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


 Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected rolling stock objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock.
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected rolling stock object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object


Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
Two Anchor Points on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line determine the height of an endpoint or an object above the ground.
BlueDot10x10.png the height of a Rolling Stock Object (locomotive, wagon, etc) CANNOT be altered
BlueDot10x10.png the Object Height Anchor, which is normally Black but turns Green when it is selected, controls the height of the object (including spline Endpoints) above the ground. This Anchor point can be moved vertically by the tool pointer
BlueDot10x10.png the Ground Height Anchor, which is Yellow, marks the position of the object on the ground. This Anchor point cannot be moved vertically by the tool pointer but its height can be changed by setting the Tool Options Palette  Height  value
It is common for both height anchors to be at the same height but there are many situation where the two will be at different heights. The examples below show situations where the two are at different heights and the height of the Object Height Anchor will need to be adjusted.


FineAdjustSplineHeightUp.png  Object Height Above Ground Height 


Steps: To bring the object height down to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag downwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor down to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving the height Anchor point, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the Anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  z  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object Pos controls. This can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


FineAdjustSplineHeightDown.png  Object Height Below Ground Height 


Steps: To bring the object height up to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag upwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor up to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor

FineAdjustSplineHeightOK.png


link Where this method fails is when the height difference between the two Anchor points exceeds the length of the  Blue  vertical Anchor line so the Ground Height Anchor or the Object Height Anchor is at the very top of the Anchor line. Once it is in that position the Object Height Anchor can no longer be moved up or down because there is no vertical Anchor line to grab.



PencilTips.PNGThe Quick Solution to this problem is to:-
DotPoint1.JPG open the object or endpont Context Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the option  Settle on Ground . For splines this option will force the spline segment to follow the contours of the ground but it will now be at the same height as the ground


A more complex alternative method is to use the Surveyor Compass Rose, the Info Palette and the Tool Options Palette.

FineAdjustSplineSetFocus.png
The Surveyor Compass Rose
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click on the terrain at a point which has the height that will be used by the object. This will position the Surveyor Compass Rose and record its data as the Focus
DotPoint2.JPG Open the Focus controls in the Info Palette by a Left Click on the small Right Arrowhead to the left of the Focus label
InfoPaletteFocusUseHeight.png The Info Palette stores the positional data, including the Height (the  z  value), of the Compass Rose under the label Focus
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the white Down Arrowhead next to the  z  value and select the menu option  Use Height for Brush . This will transfer the Focus  z  value to the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
DotPoint4.JPG Open the Context Menu for the object (or spline endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Select the option  Apply Height  or  Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint 


The Marquee Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  F  The  Marquee Tool  selects and copies objects, deletes baseboards, adds new baseboards and sets their properties, adds texture to baseboards in a Trainz World


Some features of this tool use the Scrapbook Palette, Assets Palette and Tool Options Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Marquee Tool has no drop down menu lists.

MarqueeTools S20.png
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Tool draws out a rectangular area, the Marquee Selection Area, on the route. Any objects (including Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers) that are inside the Marquee Selection Area or touched by its boundary will be selected.


PencilTips.PNGYou can use the Asset Palette filters to restrict the objects that will be selected in the Marquee Selection Area


MarqueeSelectArea S20.png

In the image above:-
DotPoint.JPG a road spline at the bottom and a house at the lower left of the Marquee Selection Area have been overlain by the drawn rectangle so they have been included in the selection.
DotPoint.JPG the Marquee Selection Area was drawn from the top left to the bottom right which places the Marquee Context Icon at the bottom right of the rectangle.
DotPoint.JPG the bottom right of the Marquee Selection Area also has a 3D Anchor Frame.
DotPoint.JPG The road spline was the last object that was included in the selection area so its Context Icons are also present.


Not shown in the image, because they are not highlighted, are the Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers that are also included in the Marquee Selection Area.

MarqueeAreaTools S20.png The Marquee Selection Area 3D Anchor Frame has some similarities to the one used with the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint.JPG the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors will move the Marquee and all its contents in the Anchor direction
DotPoint.JPG the  Blue  rotational Anchor will rotate the Marquee with all its contents in the direction of the rotation movement
DotPoint.JPG there are no  Green  and  Red  rotational Anchors
DotPoint.JPG at the centre of the 3D Anchor Frame is a Select Area Anchor. Left Click and Drag this Anchor point to move the Marquee with all its contents in any horizontal direction
DotPoint.JPG each of the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors has a resize Anchor, an orange coloured dot, located at its end. Left Click and Drag these Anchor points to resize the Marquee Selection Area (and its contents) in that specific direction


Steps: To Create a Marquee Selection Area:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Marquee Tool (or press the  F  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag out the Marquee Selection Area around the objects to be selected


The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Assets Palette filter tools can be used to restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool.
AssetsPaletteFilterSelection S20.png
Steps: To restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG set the Filter Type in the Assets Palette to  Filter Selection 
DotPoint2.JPG set the other filter options in the Assets Palette to narrow down the type of objects (e.g.  Scenery Splines  and/or enter a partial name in the Text Box)
DotPoint3.JPG select the Marquee Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  F  key)
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag out the Marquee Selection Area around the objects to be selected
Only those objects identified in the Assets Palette filters will be selected by the Marquee


Using the Filters shown above, the Marquee Selection Area only selects scenery spline objects.

MarqueeSelectSplines S20.png

Marquee Anchor Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

The following images demonstrate the effect of using the Marquee Anchor Controls on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.

 Horizontal Anchor Shift 

  The  Green  horizontal Anchor has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaShift S20.png
 


 Rotational Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  rotational Anchor has been used to rotate the Marquee Selection Area about 45° anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the Marquee Selection Area has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaRotate S20.png
 


 Vertical Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  vertical Anchor has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaUplift S20.png
 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Marquee Anchors will move:-
DotPoint.JPG the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place
DotPoint.JPG the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing
DotPoint.JPG the effect layers
DotPoint.JPG the ground heights


Marquee Anchor Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

The following images demonstrate the effect of using the Marquee Anchor Controls on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.

 Horizontal Anchor Shift 

  The  Green  Horizontal Anchor has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaShift S20.png
 


 Rotational Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Rotational Anchor has been used to rotate the Marquee Selection Area about 45° anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the Marquee Selection Area has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaRotate S20.png
 


 Vertical Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Vertical Anchor has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaUplift S20.png
 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Marquee Anchors will move:-
DotPoint.JPG the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place
DotPoint.JPG the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing
DotPoint.JPG the effect layers
DotPoint.JPG the ground heights


Scrapbook Operations

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
 But NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in the Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.


Once an area has been marked out by the Marquee Tool a number of options become available.

MarqueeEditMenu S20.png
The SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu will show some additional options specifically for the Marquee Tool:-
 Cut  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including the ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. Any scenery objects (excluding ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) that are not in a locked layer will be removed from the Marquee area. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  X  keys
 Copy  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  C  keys
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted into the route at the cursor (focus) point. Which contents will be pasted and how they will be pasted are controlled by the Filters in the Scrapbook Palette (see PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Data for more details). This option will always be available with and without a Marquee area being marked if there is a scrapbook available to be pasted. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  V  keys
 Clear  the selected scenery objects that are not in locked layers will be removed from the Marquee area but NOT the selected ground heights, ground textures and effect layers. This is the same as pressing the  Delete  key
 Select None  the Marquee Selection Area boundary lines are removed from the route cancelling the selection process. Nothing that is inside the area will be removed. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  D  keys


 Adding a New Scrapbook 

BlueDot10x10.png The  Cut  and  Copy  Scrapbook operations are also found in the Marquee Context Menu (see the Marquee Context Menu section above).


PencilTips.PNGYou don't have to use the Marquee Tool to create a new Scrapbook. You can use the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool to select any number of objects and then press  Ctrl  +  C . The selected objects, along with the ground height, ground textures, and any effect layers, will be copied into a new Scrapbook


When a new Scrapbook is created by a  Cut  or  Copy , it will appear in the Scrapbook palette with some basic details.

ScrapbookNew S20.png
The newly created scrapbook will be given:-
DotPoint.JPG a name consisting of the date and time of its creation
DotPoint.JPG a thumbnail
PencilTips.PNGThe thumbnail image will be taken using the current camera POV (point of view). To get a better image adjust the camera position and view to give the best possible shot of the Scrapbook objects before giving the  Cut  or  Copy  command
DotPoint.JPG a scrapbook number (it will be inserted as №1 scrapbook)
DotPoint.JPG an expiry date which will be set 5 days after its creation - this will countdown each day until 0 when the new scrapbook will be deleted


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Scrapbooks use very little memory so there is no real limit to how many you can store in the palette but finding the one you want will be more difficult as the list grows longer
DotPoint.JPG Rolling Stock Objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The rolling stock Context Menu option  Save to Consist Asset...  performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock objects and consists


PencilTips.PNG Deleting a Scrapbook after it has been pasted does not delete the objects that it has added to the route


There are two changes that can be made to the new scrapbook:-
DotPoint.JPG Give it a name - Left Click inside the Name Text Box and type a new name. To set its new name Left Click on the image (pressing the  Enter  key does not work - a known bug)
DotPoint.JPG Make it permanent - Left Click the white Pin icon (ScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png) to change it to blue. The scrapbook will no longer expire but it can still be deleted at any time
Pinned scrapbooks are always shown with a blue pin icon ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.png and the words "pinned, no expiry" displayed next to their scrapbook №
PencilTips.PNGThe Pinning of any scrapbook can be reversed so that it will then expire in 5 days time. Left Click the blue pin icon.
ScrapbookNewNamedPinned S20.png


Once a scrapbook has been Pinned it becomes an asset and will appear in Content Manager

ScrapbookEntryCM S20.png

The scrapbook can be uploaded to the DLS and saved as a CDP file.

PencilTips.PNGYou can archive your scrapbooks as CDP files to keep the number of installed scrapbooks to a minimum. If an archived scrapbook is needed then you can use the Import Content Files option in Content Manager to add it to the Scrapbook Palette. It can be deleted from the palette later, when no longer needed.


Managing Baseboards

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee is a powerful tool for adding, deleting and changing the properties of multiple baseboards


Marquee drawn area
Steps: To add new baseboards:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Marquee Tool (or press the  F  key).
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag to draw out an area where the new baseboards will be added. This area can include the current baseboard.
The Marquee Selection Area, shown with a green border in the image on the left, covers the existing baseboard (black, bottom left) and where 3 new baseboards will be created. The Marquee has a Context Icon as shown in the image.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the Context Icon or press the  T  key to open up the Marquee Context Menu (see Marquee Context Menu above).
DotPoint4.JPG Create, Convert, Delete
DotPoint.JPG To Create new baseboards, and to Convert selected baseboards to a different Grid Resolution, select the Context Menu option  Convert Baseboards To >  then select a resolution from two sub-options,  5m Grid  and  10m Grid . If existing baseboards have been selected then they will also be converted to the new resolution.
DotPoint.JPG To Delete baseboards select the Context Menu option  Delete Baseboards in Marquee . The  Ctrl  +  Z  keys can Undo the deletion.
DotPoint.JPG To set the selected baseboards to the  Height  value in the Tool Options Palette select the Context Menu option  Set Marquee to Brush Height . If the Marquee extends over "empty space" then new baseboards will be created at the set  Height  value.


Mass Object Moves and Clones

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
PencilTips.PNGBoth the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool can move and clone (copy) single and multiple objects. The Marquee Tool can also move and clone objects but it will include the Ground Surface Height, Ground Textures and any Effect Layers in the cloning and moving operations.

Selecting and Moving Multiple Objects

Multiple objects can be selected and moved with the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Mass Moves

The objects do not have to be:-
DotPoint.JPG the same type. They can be a mixture of scenery splines and mesh objects
DotPoint.JPG in the same layers but objects in Locked layers cannot be moved
PencilTips.PNGYou can also use the Marquee Tool to move objects but this will move Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers as well as objects.


MultipleSelectionGroup S20.png
Steps: To select multiple objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG  Shift  + Left Click on every object that is to be included in the selection group


PencilTips.PNGYou can apply the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette to the entire group of selected objects.
MultipleSelectionGroupMove S20.png
Steps: To move multiple objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected objects in the required direction
DotPoint2.JPG Release the mouse button when the group of objects are in position


PencilTips.PNGThe Fine Adjustment Tool  Blue  Rotation Anchor can be used to rotate all the members of the group with the last selected object (the one with the Context Icon) as the centre of rotation


 Selecting Multiple Identical Objects 

You can quickly select all nearby identical objects by a Double Left Click on an object.

PencilTips.PNGThis also applies to all the wagons in a consist. Double Left Click on any one of them to select all of them - they do not have to be identical wagons.


A forest of many different trees. Only one has been selected. Double Left Click on a tree to select all the identical trees in the forest.
MultipleSelectTip1 S20.png MultipleSelectTip2 S20.png


PencilTips.PNG Shift  + Double Left Click on another object. It and all its identical copies will be added to the selection.


Cloning Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png You can easily clone single and multiple selected objects. If you have selected a group of objects they do not have to be the same type - you can select scenery objects and scenery splines.


Bug.png Known Issues:

Cloning does not work with Track Objects (signals, speed signs, switches, etc) but it does work with track spline and rolling stock objects. This has been reported as a bug.


NotePad.PNG Notes: Layers and Cloning

DotPoint.JPG the objects can be in different layers
DotPoint.JPG the layers can be locked and the objects will still be cloned
DotPoint.JPG all the cloned objects will be placed into the current Active Layer which must be Unlocked
For more information on layers see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette at the end of this document.


Steps: To clone an object or a group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG use either the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool to select the object or objects
DotPoint2.JPG  Ctrl  + Left Click and Drag on any of the selected objects
FreeMoveCloneSelect S20.png FreeMoveCloneMoved S20.png


The Info Palette

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up   Bottom
If the Info Palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document. Some Info Palette functions will also require the Assets Palette and the Tool Options Palette.


S20 PaletteInfo.png
This palette can be easily overlooked but it has some very useful features:-
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the "focus" - the position of the cursor
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the position and orientation of objects (it can be used instead of the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool)
BlueDot10x10.png identifying and setting the "home" layer and binding layer of a selected object
BlueDot10x10.png used for locking and unlocking a selected objects layer

The components of the Info Palette are identified in the image below.

InfoPalette S20.png Each of the small arrowhead icons will open the palette to display more information and some controls.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

All the positional data and controls in the Info Palette are defined in the following ways:-

 x  is ALWAYS the  North-South  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 y  is ALWAYS the  East-West  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 z  is ALWAYS the  Vertical  direction (perpendicular to the compass directions) regardless of how an object has been rolled or tilted

DotPoint.JPG distances are measured in metres from the North-West corner of the first baseboard. If that baseboard is later deleted then distances will still be measured from its original and now "virtual" North-West corner.
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive distances are in the  South  and  East  directions
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative distances are in the  North  and  West  directions
DotPoint.JPG New boards added to the North of the first baseboard will have negative x coordinates and new boards added to the West of the first baseboard will have negative y coordinates.


Focus Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Focus shows the current position and height of the Cursor object.

Open up the Focus by a Left Click on its arrowhead icon.

PencilTips.PNGBefore changing the cursor position with the Focus controls, set a Bookmark at its current position.


InfoPaletteFocus S20.png


The current cursor position is shown in the x, y and z text boxes. These values can be edited to move the cursor to a new position but CARE will be needed.

PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x or y value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the cursor will be refocused at a point on the baseboard edge that is the closest to the entered co-ordinates.


PencilTips.PNGIf it has not been deleted you can identify the original (first) baseboard by entering 0 as the Focus  x  and  y  co-ordinates


Next to the z co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteFocusMenu S20.png There is only one option in the sub-menu.  Use Height for Brush 
Left Click on the option to copy the current cursor height (z) value from the Info Palette to the Tool Options Palette  Height  entry.


Asset Name Menu

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for a name to be shown and for this menu to be available.

InfoPaletteMulti S20.png If more than one object has been selected then the name and position data shown will be for the last selected object. If different objects (with different kuid codes) have been selected then a count of the additional objects will be added. The (+2) shown in the object name in the image on the left indicates that 2 additional different objects are in the group of selected objects.


Next to the objects name is a small white Down Arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteMenu S20.png The menu options are:-
 Copy   NOT WORKING  (a known bug) - copies the objects text details into the OS Clipboard for pasting, for example, into a text editor
 Show Asset Details  opens a new window showing the image and description of the selected object
 List Assets in New Window  opens up Content Manager and lists all the selected objects
 Add to Picklist  adds selected objects to a Picklist
 Remove from Picklist  removes selected objects from a Picklist (objects must already be in a Picklist)
 Select in Assets Palette  selects and highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette


Position Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the position data to be shown and edited. Open up the position data by a Left Click on its Pos: arrowhead icon.

InfoPalettePos S20.png The position of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the x, y and z text boxes. These values can be edited to move the object or objects to a new position but CARE will be needed.


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x or y value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the objects will be moved to that position and may vanish from view. The Undo command can be used to reverse the move or the Marquee Tool can be used to add a baseboard under the "floating" objects.


Next to the z co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPalettePosMenu S20.png There is only one option in the sub-menu.  Use Height for Brush 
Left Click on the option to copy the current cursor height (z) value from the Info Palette to the Tool Options Palette  Height  entry.


Rotation Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the rotation data to be shown and edited. Open up the rotation data by a Left Click on its Rot: arrowhead icon.

InfoPaletteRot S20.png The rotational orientation of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the r, p and y text boxes (the letters stand for Roll, Pitch and Yaw). These values can be edited to rotate the object or objects in 3D space BUT not all objects can be rotated in certain directions.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If several objects have been selected then the last selected object, the one with the Context Icon, will be the centre of all rotations.
DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will allow rotations. For example, SpeedTree objects can only be rotated using the  y  value ( r  and  p  entries will be ignored) while Spline objects cannot be rotated at all


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the rotation angle in increments of 1°.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The rotation data and controls are defined in the following ways:-

 r  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis (which was defined when it was created).
This is the same as the  Red  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 p  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis PLUS 90°.
This is the same as the  Green  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 y  ALWAYS rotates in the horizontal plane around the compass Z or Vertical axis regardless of how the object has been rolled or pitched.

This is similar to but NOT exactly the same as the  Blue  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool

 Rot:   y  = East 90° North 180° West 270° South
Original
RotationAxis S20.png
Roll:  r = 45 
RotationAxisRoll S20.png
Pitch:  p = 45 
RotationAxisPitch S20.png
Yaw:  y = 45 
RotationAxisYaw S20.png
 

DotPoint.JPG Some objects will NOT allow Roll or Pitch rotations
DotPoint.JPG all angles are measured in degrees
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive angles are anticlockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative angles are clockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG angles greater than 360° can be entered but will give the same result as the angle minus 360°. For example: 450° is exactly the same angle as 90° (450°-360°=90°)
DotPoint.JPG clockwise and anti-clockwise angles are complementary. For example: entering -270° (clockwise) will give the same angle as entering +90° (anticlockwise)


Layer Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the layer data to be shown and edited. Open up the layer data by a Left Click on its Layer: arrowhead icon.

NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Info Palette is best used to show and edit the layer and binding layer assignments of individual selected objects
DotPoint.JPG operations such as creating, deleting, merging, renaming, moving and hiding layers are performed using the Layers Palette
DotPoint.JPG layers can be Locked and Unlocked using the Info Palette or the Layers Palette but the Layers Palette is often the better choice for these tasks


InfoPaletteLayer S20.png This will show the:-
DotPoint.JPG current layer assigned to the selected object
DotPoint.JPG its assigned Binding Layer (if any)
DotPoint.JPG the Locked or Unlocked state of the assigned layer
  InfoPaletteLockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Unlocked. Click this button to Lock the layer
  InfoPaletteUnlockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Locked. Click this button to Unlock the layer
  Using this button will also change the Locked or Unlocked padlock icon shown next to the layer name in the Layers Palette
AssetsPaletteLockedUnlockedLayers S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Locked Layer cannot be deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG Locked Layers can be deleted, moved and merged with other layers


InfoPaletteLayersMulti S20.png If multiple objects from different layers have been selected then no layer name will be shown in the Layer and Binding boxes. Instead they will be left "blank" as shown in the image on the left.

Both boxes can still be opened to assign layers to objects.

Stop.PNG WARNING:
DotPoint.JPG Setting a layer for multiple objects that are in different layers will move ALL those objects to that layer
DotPoint.JPG If objects are moved from one layer group to another (such as from the Route Layers to the Session Layers) then it will change where those objects are saved (in the Route or in the Session)


Assigning Objects to a Different Layer

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

A selected object or group of selected objects can be assigned to a different layer. If multiple objects have been selected then they do not have to all be in the same layer.

InfoPaletteLayerDropBoxList S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the Layer drop down box. The layer containing the object (for a single selected object only) will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the destination layer name from the drop down list. See Warning above
The layer reassignment will start the instant the destination layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


Once a target layer has been selected then the  Select Layer  button, which sets the Active Layer, may become active.

BlueDot10x10.png The Active Layer is the layer used by the Placement Tool when objects are added to a route (or session). This button gives you the opportunity to set the Active Layer to the same layer that you just used to assign to an object. Its use is optional.


PencilTips.PNGYou can also set the Active Layer by selecting its name from the list in the Layers Palette.


Options: To set current layer to the Active Layer:-
Ablue.png If the  Select Layer  button is greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOff S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to the current Active Layer so there is no need to use this option
Bblue.png If it is NOT greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOn S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to a layer that is not the current Active Layer. Left Click on the  Select Layer  button to switch the Active Layer to the same layer as the object


Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Binding Layer, or Bound Layer as it is also called, is a tool used in the development of a route or session. It allows you to temporarily assign an object to a second layer while it is still in its original layer. The object will then take on the properties (Locked or Unlocked, Hidden or Visible) of both layers.
Assigned
Layer
Binding
Layer
Object
Status
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked
LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png or LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeOpen S20.png or None LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible
LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeOpen S20.png or LayerEyeClosed S20.png or None LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
In Summary:-
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Locked then the object will be Locked
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Hidden then the object will be Hidden
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Hidden Layer cannot be seen and therefore, cannot be selected, deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG The Layers Palette is the ONLY way to create, delete, name and hide layers


Some examples of using the Binding Layer:-
 Example 1: 
The problem: You need to stop an object from being selected so that you can you move other objects on or around it
The solution: Use the Layers Palette to create a new empty layer and lock it. Set the Binding Layer of the object to the new locked layer. The object will then be locked so it cannot be selected or moved even though its original layer is unlocked. When the edit has been completed delete the empty locked layer you just created to unlock all its bound objects and remove all their bindings
 Example 2: 
The problem: A group of objects (e.g trees) are blocking access to another object.
The solution: Use the Layers Palette to create a new empty layer and hide it. Set the Binding Layer of the blocking objects to the new hidden layer. The blocking objects will no longer be visible and cannot be selected even though their original layer is still visible. When the edit has been completed delete the empty hidden layer you just created to make all its bound objects visible and remove all their bindings


InfoPaletteBindingDropBox S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned binding layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the Binding drop down box. If the object is already bound to a layer (for a single selected object only) the binding layer will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the Binding layer name from the drop down list. Note: the objects assigned layer will not appear in the list because an object cannot be bound to its own layer
The layer reassignment will start the instant the layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


As an example, the image below shows what you will see for a single object that has had:-
InfoPaletteLayerSetBindingSet S20.png
DotPoint.JPG its assigned layer changed (in the example from "route-layer" to "Station Buildings")
DotPoint.JPG its binding layer set (in the example to "Multi Industries")
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is not locked so you have the option to lock it
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is not the Active Layer so you have the option to make it the Active Layer


LinkWiki.PNG

More information on creating, editing and using Layers can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Use Layers


  SkipUp.png Top Next Up    


Trainz Wiki

TrainzWiki.png

More Tutorials and Guides to Using Trainz


This page was created by Trainz user pware in January 2023 and was last updated as shown below.


Edit Effect Layers...

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

When this Target is selected, the Edit Effect Layer dialogue box will appear. This is the same as selecting  Edit Effect Layers ...  from the SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu.

Open effect layers Options:

Ablue.png If no Effect Layers are present then you can create a new one

New effect layer

Bblue.png If Effect Layers are present then select one to edit

Edit effect layers


PencilTips.PNG Effect Layers are created for each route. You can select and edit a previously saved Effect Layer rather than having to recreate the entire effect each time.


LinkWiki.PNG

More information on creating and editing Effect Layers can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

TurfFX_Effect_Layer
Clutter_Effect_Layer
Water_Effect_Layer


The Placement Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom


S20 PlacementToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  E  The  Placement Tool  adds objects to a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette and the Assets Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


PencilTips.PNG When selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easier to identify that the Placement Tool is active PlacementToolPointer S20.png


The Placement Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Placement Tools
PencilTips.PNG More Placement Options
After an object has been placed in a route its position and/or height can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png using the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Cblue.png editing its  x   y   z  settings in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Dblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu

The first step is to identify and select the particular object that you want to add to the route.

Placing a Scenery Mesh Object

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.
Steps: To add a Scenery Mesh Object the first step is to identify the exact asset you want to add. Steps DotPoint1.JPG, DotPoint2.JPG and DotPoint3.JPG are common to placing ALL types of objects but the selection of the object in step DotPoint1.JPG will change for different types of objects.


DotPoint1.JPG In the Asset Palette choose one of the following:-

Options:
Left Click on an asset selection icon

Filter Icons

GroundTextureFilter S20.png all ground textures
SceneryMeshFilter S20.png all non-spline scenery assets
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png all spline scenery assets
TrackSplineFilter S20.png all track spline assets
TrackMeshFilter S20.png all track (non spline) assets (signals, etc)
TrainFilter S20.png all rolling stock assets
PresetFilter S20.png all Effect Layer presets
OR
Left Click the Content Drop-down Box

Filter List
Then select Scenery Objects
Scenery Objects

OR
PencilTips.PNG  Shortcut 
If you already have the same object placed in your route then:-
DotPoint1Blue.png move the tool pointer over the object to be selected and hold down the  Alt  key. The object name will appear in a ToolTip attached to the pointer
DotPoint2Blue.png while holding down the  Alt  key Left Click on the object to identify it in the Assets Palette and automatically select it for placement with the Placement Tool. Release the key
Jump to Step DotPoint4.JPG below (for a Scenery Mesh Object) or to Step DotPoint4.JPG in one of the sections below (for a different type of object).
DotPoint2.JPG Optional: To narrow down the filter list type part of the object name into the Search Text Box. For example if you have selected Scenery Objects and want to find "barns", then type "barn" (UPPER/lower case does not matter).
Text search This will list all the Scenery Objects containing the text "barn" in their name or description.
Filtered list DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the required item in the list.

When selected the object will be highlighted on a blue background and its name will appear in the Assets Palette title bar.

PencilTips.PNG
If you are not certain that a selected asset is the right one then try the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Double Left Click on the name in the Asset List to bring up its image and description, OR
Bblue.png view its rotating and resizeable 3D image in the Preview Palette, OR
Cblue.png switch the asset list to Thumbnail View (best used when the palette is undocked and enlarged).
See the Wiki Page at WikiLink.PNG How to Use the Surveyor 2.0 Palettes for more details


PencilTips.PNG A Left Click on an object in the Assets Palette filter list will automatically activate the Placement Tool so the next Left Click in the route will place that object in the route.


DotPoint4.JPG The final step is to place the selected object into the route.
Steps:
DotPoint1Blue.png if the Placement Tool is not selected then Left Click it or press the  E  key
DotPoint2Blue.png Left Click on the spot where you want to place the object
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Placement Tool will remain on and active until another tool has been selected. So everytime you Left Click another copy of the object (or another object if you change your selection) will be added to the route
DotPoint.JPG the last object placed will be highlighted (covered in "green/yellow"). This will be the selected object if you switch control to the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool


Scenery Mesh Object Context Menu Options

Once a scenery mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu.


 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
See PageLink.PNG Mesh Object Context Menu for more details.


 Moving Scenery Mesh Objects 

Once an scenery mesh object has been added to a route its height can be changed with the Placement Tool.
DotPoint.JPG See PageLink.PNG Placement Tool Options below.
It can also be easily deleted.
DotPoint.JPG See PageLink.PNG Deleting Placed Objects below.
But to move most placed objects (Track Objects and Rolling Stock Objects are exceptions - see below) you must switch to one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png PageLink.PNG The Free Move Tool OR
Bblue.png PageLink.PNG The Fine Ajustment Tool


Placing a Scenery or Track Spline

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.


Steps: Start the process of laying a track or spline by identifying and selecting the track or scenery spline as described in steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Scenery Spline or the Track filter in the Assets Palette
Options:
Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
ScenerySplineFilter S20.png spline scenery assets OR TrackSplineFilter S20.png track spline assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Scenery Splines  OR  Track 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementTrack1 S20.png DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the spot where the spline will start. This will place the start or first endpoint of the spline.
DotPoint5.JPG Move the mouse in the direction you want to lay the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
PlacementTrack2 S20.png DotPoint6.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the first spline segment, Left Click again. This will anchor the second spline endpoint. The spline between the two endpoints is the first spline segment.


The spline segment will now have three Context Icons, one for each endpoint and one for the spline segment.

PencilTips.PNG Different context menu options are provided depending on which icon you Left Click on
PlacementTrack3 S20.png DotPoint7.JPG Left Click on the new endpoint and move the mouse in the direction you want to continue laying the spline or track. The spline will follow the mouse wherever you move it.
NotePad.PNG Notes: Curves for Trainz Geeks

Splines and track splines are created and stored using Bezier Curves, a mathematical formula commonly used for curves in computer graphics. Each spline segment, curved or straight, is described using just 4 points regardless of its length and complexity. This gives significant savings in storage and processing. Unfortunately, real world curves are rarely described by simple Bezier Curves. This can sometimes create difficulties when modelling curves from the real world so approximations often have to be used in the Trainz World.
PlacementTrack4 S20.png DotPoint8.JPG When you have the tool pointer in the final position for the second spline segment, Left Click again. This will anchor the third spline endpoint and the Context Icons will move to the new segment.
PencilTips.PNG Adding a Junction and Editing
DotPoint.JPG To add a junction to a spline segment Left Click on it with the Placement Tool at the point where you want to insert the junction, including at an endpoint. Then move the mouse to draw out the new spline segment.
DotPoint.JPG To edit a spline segment  DO NOT  click on it with the Placement Tool as this will insert a junction. Select the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool and then Left Click on the segment to be edited.
Repeat Steps DotPoint7.JPG and DotPoint8.JPG above to continue laying the spline.


Spline Object Context Menu Options

Once a spline object has been placed you can open either of its two Context Menus - one for the spline segment and one for the endpoints (Left Click on one of its icons or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu (the exact menu will depend on whether a segment or an endpoint was selected).


 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
See PageLink.PNG Spline Object Context Menu for more details.


 Spline Heights 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used

When you start adding a spline to a route it will always be placed at the height of the terrain regardless of the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting.

However, you can set the heights of any selected segment or endpoint.

To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) the  Apply Height  option, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Placing Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (e.g. signals, speed signs, switches, etc), both visible and invisible, can only be attached to track splines.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Visible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Signals, speed signs, end buffers, switches
Invisible examples of track objects include:-
DotPoint.JPG Trackmarks, triggers, direction and priority markers


Steps: Follow steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Track Object filter in the Assets Palette.
Options:

Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
TrackMeshFilter S20.png track (non spline) assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Track Objects 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementTrackObject S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the track at the position where you want the Track Object to be placed.

Once it has been placed it can be moved, Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot in the middle of the track) to any position along the track or to another track.

PencilTips.PNG Moving Track Objects can also be performed, with more control and additional options, using the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool.


Track Mesh Object Context Menu Options
Once a track mesh object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. One or both of the following specific options will appear, amongst others, in the popup Context Menu.
 Rotate Trackside  swaps the position of the object to the other side of the track so that it faces the opposite direction
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch or junction then its switch direction will be reversed
See PageLink.PNG Track Object Context Menu for more details.


Placing Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (e.g. locomotives, passenger cars and wagons) can only be attached to track splines.


Steps: Follow steps DotPoint1.JPG DotPoint2.JPG DotPoint3.JPG in PageLink.PNG Placing a Scenery Mesh Object above but in Step DotPoint1.JPG select the Rolling Stock filter in the Assets Palette.
Options:

Select from the Assets Palette icons:-
TrainFilter S20.png rolling stock assets
OR
Select from the Assets Palette drop down list:-
 Rolling Stock 


Then continue as shown below:-
PlacementRollingStockObject S20.png
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click on the track at the position where you want the Rolling Stock Object to be placed.

Once it has been placed it can be moved, Left Click and Drag the Anchor Point (the small yellow dot) to any position along the track or to another track. It can also be coupled to a consist and then decoupled by dragging the same Anchor Point.

PencilTips.PNG Moving, coupling and decoupling Rolling Stock Objects can also be performed, with more control, using the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool.


Rolling Stock Object Context Menu Options
Once a rolling stock object has been placed you can open its Context Menu (Left Click on its icon or press the  T  key) to access a range of options and functions. The following specific options, amongst others, will appear in the popup Context Menu.
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
See PageLink.PNG Rolling Stock Object Context Menu for more details.


Placement Tool Options

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
NotePad.PNG Notes:

 
DotPoint.JPG These options do not apply to Rolling Stock Objects
DotPoint.JPG To use the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting with the Placement Tool a value must be entered followed by the  Enter  key OR select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to use the current setting. This must be performed after the object has been been placed.


 Placement Mesh Object Height Options 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


PlacementMeshHeight0 S20.png PlacementMeshHeight3 S20.png

In Surveyor 2.0 track objects as well as scenery mesh objects can be given a height - in the case of track objects the height is above (or below) the track.

To set the height of a selected scenery or track mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Bblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Cblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).
The object will be moved to the set height above (or below) the terrain. The vertical yellow line shown in the second image on the left indicates the height change. The small yellow dot at the base of the line is the terrain attachment point for the object.


 Placement Spline (and Track) Options 


Splines have two Placement Tool settings in the Tool Options Palette.

PlacementSplineTools S20.png
 Grade  spline gradient (see Notes: below). The finishing endpoint of each spline segment will be set higher (for a positive grade) or lower (for a negative grade) than the starting endpoint
Range:  0% (flat) to ±100% (steep but not vertical)
PencilTips.PNG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on a track or spline segment to copy the Grade value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments.
 Condition  this applies to Track Spline objects and sets the track condition (or "ride comfort") for each segment
Range:  1% (terrible track condition) to 100% (perfect track condition)
PencilTips.PNGThe Track Condition can also be set for each track segment in its Context Menu  Edit Properties  option


PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  The  Grade  is defined as vertical rise divided by horizontal distance converted to a percentage figure. So a grade of 100% (the maximum allowed) would mean a gradient formed by both measurements having the same value (e.g. a rise of 50m over a distance of 50m). A vertical grade (such as up a cliff face) would have an infinite grade which is currently impossible in Surveyor.


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Deleting Placed Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
Steps: To delete objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG
Select the object or a group of objects by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Free Move Tool (or press  S ) OR
Bblue.png Fine Adjustment Tool (or press  D )
  Multiple objects can be selected by holding down the  Shift  key when using these tools
Then ..
DotPoint2.JPG
Choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Press the  Delete  key, OR
Bblue.png Open the Context Menu of the object (or object group) and select the  Delete  option
PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG You can also use the Marquee Tool to select an area of the route to delete its objects
DotPoint.JPG With these tools (Free Move, Fine Adjustment and Marquee) you can restrict the objects that can be selected and deleted by using filters in the Assets Palette. For more information see PageLink.PNG Narrowing the Search in the Eyedropper Tool section below


The Eyedropper Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 DropperToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  R  The  Eyedropper Tool  identifies and selects objects in a Trainz World
This tool uses the Assets Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


PencilTips.PNGWhen selected, this tool has a distinctive pointer icon which makes it easy to identify that the Eyedropper Tool is active EyedropperToolPointer S20.png


The Eyedropper Tool has no drop down menu lists.

PencilTips.PNGAn Eyedropper is inside all the tools so you can quickly identify any object without having to switch to the Eyedropper Tool and back again.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and move the pointer tool onto an object to reveal its name as a ToolTip
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on an object to select it in the Assets Palette list
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the terrain to copy the Height value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting. That value can then be used to set the brush Height for other terrain areas
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on a track or spline segment to copy the Grade value at that point into the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments


Eyedropper Tools When selected, the Eyedropper Tool will change the tool pointer to an "eyedropper" icon.


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG move the eyedropper pointer over any object to reveal its name in a  ToolTip  below the pointer
DotPoint.JPG hold the eyedropper over any object for a few seconds to reveal more information
DotPoint.JPG Left Click on an object to select it in the Assets Palette


Quick Steps

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

DotPoint1.JPG With the Eyedropper Tool selected, move the tool pointer (which will now be an eyedropper symbol) onto any object in view.

Eyedropper
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the object to identify it (highlighted in grey) in the Assets Palette filter list AssetFilterNameHighlighted S20.png
Asset filter set by the Eyedropper in S20


DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the object name in the Assets Palette filter list to select it (highlighted in blue) and switch control to the Placement Tool so the next Left Click in the route will place the selected object in the route.

AssetFilterNameSelected S20.png


Narrowing the Search

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Sometimes (or often) a scene will be too crowded with different scenery objects to be able to use the Eyedropper Tool to easily select a single object. In these cases additional options are available to help "remove the clutter".
PencilTips.PNGThese filter options can be used with the Placement Tool, Free Move Tool, Fine Adjustment Tool and the Marquee Tool as well as with the Eyedropper Tool


At the top of the Assets Palette is a drop down box which controls how the Tool works with the filters that you set.

Assets palette The drop down box will provide three options:-
BulletTick.png Filter List
BulletTick.png Filter Selection
BulletTick.png Filter Visibility
AssetsPaletteFilterOptions S20.png


These options work with the Asset Filters to help narrow the search for a specific object or type of object that is in the route.

Asset Filter Options:
 Filter List  this option will have no effect on the operation of the Tool or on the objects displayed on the screen. It is the default setting and any selections made with the Tool will be shown in the Assets Palette as described in the section Quick Steps above.
 Filter Selection  this option will restrict the Tool to only working on those objects that are in the filtered list. Objects that are not in the filtered list cannot be selected.
 Filter Visibility  this option will hide all objects that are not in the filtered list. The only exceptions are Ground Textures and Effect Layers which will be visible but, unless they are also in the filtered list, cannot be selected.

As an example the following images show the progressive application of a Visibility Filter.

AssetFilterScene1 S20.png AssestFilteredScene1.png DotPoint1Blue.png No filter has been applied.


All the objects are visible on the Surveyor screen.

ALL objects can be selected.

AssetFilterScene2 S20.png AssestFilteredScene2.png

DotPoint2Blue.png The Visibility Filter option has been applied and the filtered list has been set to display only Scenery Splines.

All objects except Scenery Splines, Ground Textures and Effect Layers are now hidden.

Now only Scenery Splines can be selected.

AssetFilterScene3 S20.png AssestFilteredScene3.png

DotPoint3Blue.png An additional filter has been applied. The word "fence" has been added to the search text box.

All Scenery Splines that do not have the text "fence" in their names or descriptions have now been hidden.

Now only the remaining visible Scenery Splines can be selected.


The Free Move Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FreeMoveToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  S  The  Free Move Tool  moves objects around a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Free Move Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Free Move Tools
PencilTips.PNGFree Move Alternatives
In addition to the Free Move Tool the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Fine Adjustment Tool OR
Bblue.png editing its  x   y   z  values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette OR
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


Free Move: Scenery Mesh Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.

 Free Move: Move a Mesh Object 

FreeMoveToolCar S20.png
Steps: To move a Scenery Mesh Object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool (or press the  S  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object in any horizontal direction


NotePad.PNG When moving a scenery object, its height will be fixed to the terrain height.


 Free Move: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  setting from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Free Move: Mesh Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. Left Click on the icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects from the route and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If no object has been selected in the Assets Palette or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the selected objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random rotation angle to each selected object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


Free Move: Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track

 Free Move: Move a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track
FreeMoveTrackObject S20.png
Step: To move a track object horizontally:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the object anywhere in the horizontal plane including away from the track

FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png


PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see the next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track

Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally.

 Free Move: Set the Height of a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
Throw Lever track object level with the track
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .
FreeMoveTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png
After being moved vertically
PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting

 Free Move: Track Object Context Menu 

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context menuchoose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select  in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.

FreeMoveTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu (Left Click the icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


Free Move: Spline Objects (Including Track)

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.
Moving a spline can involve moving one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png a segment, OR
Cblue.png multiple segments including the whole length of the spline


 Free Move: Move Spline Endpoints 

FreeMoveToolSpline S20.png
Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected spline endpoint in any horizontal direction
Active (selected) endpoints are shown as green. Inactive spline endpoints are shown as black


NotePad.PNG The spline endpoint will be fixed at its original height.


 Free Move: Move Spline Segments 

Splines are frequently made of multiple segments joined together. You can easily move a spline by moving its segments, individually or as a group.

spline made of 3 joined segments
NotePad.PNG Not all splines have endpoints at each ends. As shown in the image on the left, some splines will have an "endcap" that is attached to the start of the first segment and to the end of the last segment. The use of an endcap is a purely cosmetic effect - to give the spline a more distinctive appearance.


FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelected S20.png
Steps: To move an individual segment or multiple segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or press the  S  key
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click on the spline segment to be moved - click anywhere between the two spline endpoints on the segment
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the selected segment will be highlighted in green/yellow.
DotPoint.JPG The segment will have a temporary endpoint inserted at the location you clicked.


PencilTips.PNGTemporary spline endpoints can be made permanent by selecting the  Insert Spline Point Here  option from the segment Context Menu


FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelected S20.png
IF you are going to select and move more than one spline segment, then:-
DotPoint3.JPG hold the  Shift  key down and individually Left Click between the endpoints on each additional segment.


The last segment that you Left Click will have the temporary endpoint and Context Icons added.
PencilTips.PNGTo select ALL the segments in a spline, Double Left Click on a segment

If the spline contains a junction then this will only select all the segments upto the junction point

The segment that you double-clicked will have the temporary endpoint and Context Icons added.
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected segment(s) in any horizontal direction.
If you had selected:-
DotPoint.JPG only a single spline segment then only that segment will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will have their shapes (but not their endpoints) adjusted
DotPoint.JPG multiple spline segments then those segments will be moved and the adjacent segments that were not selected will also have their shapes adjusted
DotPoint.JPG the entire spline then ALL the segments and endpoints will be moved
FreeMoveSplineSegmentSelectedMoved S20.png FreeMoveSplineSegmentsAllSelectedMoved S20.png


 Free Move: Set Spline Height 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png firstly select the spline segment or endpoint and then Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Cblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Dblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Free Move: Spline Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

ContextIconsSpline S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:
Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


To open a selected objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


SplineEndPointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineObject S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png


 Cut  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Copy  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the Tool Options Palette.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint between two segments and merges the segments into one. Two segments can also be merged by deleting a selected endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected spline


Free Move: Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.

 Free Move: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

Use the Free Move tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FreeMoveRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".
This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.
PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png
The simple solution is to use the Free Move Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.


 Free Move: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  + Left Click on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one (Left Click) or more ( Shift  + Left Click) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


 Free Move: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select (Left Click) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  + Left Click to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  + Left Click, on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu by choosing one of the following:-

Options:
Ablue.png Left Click on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR
Bblue.png press the  T  key

DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1Blue.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2Blue.png Context Icon on the Guard Van
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png

Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


 Free Move: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected rolling stock object's Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock.
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected rolling stock object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object


The Fine Adjustment Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 FineAdjustmentToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  D  The  Fine Adjustment Tool  makes 3D adjustments (position and rotations) to objects in a Trainz World
This tool uses the Tool Options Palette. If this palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Fine Adjustment Tool has no drop down menu lists.

Fine Adjustment Tools
PencilTips.PNGFine Adjustment Alternatives
In addition to the Fine Adjustment Tool the position and/or height of objects can be changed by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png using the PageLink.PNG Free Move Tool
Bblue.png editing its  x   y   z   r   p   y  values in PageLink.PNG The Info Palette
Cblue.png selecting the  Apply Height  option in its Context Menu


BlueDot10x10.png The most obvious feature of the Fine Adjustment Tool is the 3D Anchor Frame it adds to a selected object. The frame is made of 3 straight and 3 curved coloured lines, called Anchors, which control the position and orientation of an object or a group of objects.
FineAdjust3DFrame S20.png The Anchor controls are:-
 The Horizontal and Vertical Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  move the object (forward/back or up/down) in the direction of the Anchor line
 The Rotational Anchors 
 Red   Green   Blue  rotate the object (clockwise and anti-clockwise) along the Anchor Arc Line centred around the Anchor Straight Line of the same colour
NotePad.PNG Not all objects will have  Red  and/or  Green  rotational Anchors.
 The Object Anchor 
     (black central dot) moves the object in any horizontal direction
NotePad.PNG The orientation of the  Red  and  Green  horizontal anchor lines is based on the orientation of the object when it is placed in the scene, not on the compass directions
Steps: To use the Fine Adjustment Tool controls:-
DotPoint1.JPG move the tool pointer onto an Anchor - its colour will change to yellow for Anchor lines or green for the Object Anchor
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the Object Anchor in any direction or move the pointer along the chosen Anchor Line in the required direction (e.g. up on the blue vertical Anchor or clockwise around the arc of the red rotational Anchor)


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving anchors, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  x   y   z  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object  Pos:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below), OR
Cblue.png use the  r   p   y  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object  Rot:  controls. These arrows can be used to set the rotation to accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


Fine Adjustment: Scenery Mesh Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Individual "non-spline" scenery objects that are not attached to track are often referred to in Trainz terminology as Scenery Mesh Objects.

 Fine Adjustment: Move a Mesh Object 

To move an object with the Fine Adjustment Tool choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag anywhere on the selected object (except on an Anchor line) to move it freely in any horizontal direction
OR
Bblue.png Left Click and Drag on an Anchor line to move or rotate it in the direction of the line or arc
These operations can also be performed on a group of selected objects. The 3D Anchor Frame will be on the last object added to the group.


 Blue  vertical Anchor movement
FineAdjustZMove S20.png
   Green  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustYawMove S20.png
   Red  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustPitchMove S20.png
   Blue  Anchor rotation
FineAdjustRotateXYMove S20.png


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will have  Red  or  Green  Rotational Anchors
DotPoint.JPG Objects can be restored to their original height and rotation settings by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reset Object Rotation  to cancel the rotation changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change
DotPoint.JPG The  Randomise Object Rotation  option in the Context Menu only affects rotations around the vertical axis - the  Blue  Rotational Anchor.


 Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Scenery Mesh Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Scenery Mesh objects can be raised above and lowered below the ground level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected scenery mesh object (e.g. a house) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


To set the height of a selected scenery mesh object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key. This works even if the  Height  icon is not coloured  Gold . OR
Cblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png select the  Apply Height  option from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) to apply an existing height value, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Fine Adjustment: Mesh Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery mesh object, or a group of selected scenery mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. Left Click on the icon or press the  T  key. The icon design will vary between object types.


ContextMenuMeshObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If no object has been selected in the Assets Palette or it is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline instead of a mesh object) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reset Object Rotation  resets the rotation angle of the objects to their default values
 Randomise Object Rotation  applies a random  Blue  Rotation Anchor angle to each object around its vertical axis
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


Fine Adjustment: Track Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Track Objects (signals, switches, speed signs, markers, etc) are always attached to an existing track
BlueDot10x10.png In Surveyor 2.0 they can be moved left, right, above and below the track

 Fine Adjustment: Move a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be dragged to new positions along and beside the track
FineAdjustTrackObject S20.png
To move a track object horizontally, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png For movements along the track - Left Click and Drag:-
DotPoint.JPG anywhere within the object (except on an Anchor Line or Anchor Point), OR
DotPoint.JPG on the  Green  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line and track only)
Bblue.png For movements left or right of the track - Left Click and Drag
DotPoint.JPG on the  Red  horizontal Anchor line (movement is restricted to the Anchor line only), OR
DotPoint.JPG on the Object Anchor (the black dot) to get unrestricted horizontal movement
For most track objects the Rotational Anchors have no effect
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png
PencilTips.PNGSituations where it is useful to be able to move a track object away from the track include:-
DotPoint.JPG placing Track Marks and Triggers above (see next section) or beside the track so that they are not hidden by consists parked on top of them
DotPoint.JPG repositioning switches, signals, track signs closer to or further away from the track - particularly useful if the track object was originally created for a different gauge track


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been moved away from or closer to the track will still function normally.

 Fine Adjustment: Set the Height of a Track Object 

BlueDot10x10.png Track objects can be raised above and lowered below the track level.
PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a selected track mesh object (e.g. a signal) into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by:-
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click in the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette
DotPoint2.JPG select the  Get Height from Selection  option


FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveH S20.png

Throw Lever track object level with track
FineAdjustTrackObjectMoveHV S20.png

After being moved vertically
To set the height of a selected track object, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value followed by the  Enter  key OR
Cblue.png in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting, enter a value then Right Click and select  Set Height to Selection  OR
Dblue.png from the objects Context Menu select the  Apply Height  option to apply an existing height setting, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


PencilTips.PNGA situation where it might be useful to raise a signal above the track level would be to place it higher up on the wall of a cutting


BlueDot10x10.png Track objects that have been "height adjusted" will still function normally and can still be moved along the track without reversing the height change .


NotePad.PNG For most track objects the Rotational Anchors have no effect


 Fine Adjustment: Track Object Context Menu 

A selected track mesh object, or a group of selected track mesh objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected track objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon ContextIconsTrackObjects S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuTrackObject S20.png
 Cut  remove the selected object or objects and move them into the Scrapbook
 Copy  copy the selected object or objects and place them into the Scrapbook
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the selected objects. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Object with Selected Asset  the selected object will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the object to match the set height of the object. If multiple objects at different heights have been selected then the terrain height will be set to match, as far as possible, the height of each object
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the objects to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth")
 Apply Height  sets the height of the objects to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Reattach to Track  if the object has been moved away from the track then it will be reset to its correct position on the track
 Rotate Trackside  reverses the position of the object on the track (e.g. to the other side)
 Change Junction Direction  if the object is a track switch then its switch direction will be reversed
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected object


NotePad.PNG Notes:

  Track objects can be restored to their original height and position (on the track) by opening their Context Menu and choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png  Reattach to Track  to cancel the both the height and position changes, OR
Bblue.png  Settle on Ground  to cancel the height change only


Track objects can also be rotated to the opposite side of the track.

FineAdjustTrackObjectReversed S20.png
Steps: To rotate a track object:-
DotPoint1.JPG Open the track objects Context Menu (Left Click the icon or press the  T  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Select the option  Rotate Trackside 
Rotating a track object does not change its distance from the track or its height.


Fine Adjustment: Spline Objects (Including Track)

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Scenery splines and track splines are defined by their endpoints. Splines are usually added to a route as a series of joined segments linked at the endpoints.
To move a spline, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png moving an endpoint, OR
Bblue.png moving a segment, OR
Cblue.png moving multiple segments including the whole length of the spline


 Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Endpoints 

FineAdjustSplineEndPoint S20.png

The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline endpoint.

Steps: To move an individual spline endpoint:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint2.JPG Select, Left Click on, the spline endpoint to be moved.
Note: only the horizontal  Red  and  Green  and the vertical  Blue  lines can be selected.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor to move the endpoint in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png the endpoint itself to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


 Fine Adjustment: Move Spline Segments 

NotePad.PNG The  Green  rotational Anchor CANNOT be used on Track splines


FineAdjustSplineSegment S20.png The 3D Anchor Frame shown is for a spline segment.
Steps: To move spline segments:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint2.JPG Select, Left Click on, the spline segment to be moved.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click and Drag one of the following:-
 
Options:
Ablue.png an Anchor to move the endpoint in that specific direction, OR
Bblue.png anywhere in a segment to move it in any direction in the horizontal plane


PencilTips.PNG To select:-
DotPoint.JPG more than one segment -  Shift  + Left Click on each segment
DotPoint.JPG ALL the segments - Double Left Click on a segment. This will select segments in both directions from the segment clicked. If the spline contains a junction then this will only select the segments upto the junction point


FineAdjustSplineSegmentStraight S20.png Selecting a spline segment with the Fine Adjustment Tool will add a Temporary Endpoint at the point where the segment was clicked.


This will produce 3 Fine Adjustment Tool control frames, one at each end of the segment and one at the click point, as shown in the image on the left. The whole segment can be moved, as shown in the following images, by a Left Click and Drag anywhere within the segment.
FineAdjustSplineSegmentXYMove S20.png
Segment moved to the right along the  Red  horizontal Anchor line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentZMove S20.png
Segment moved up along the  Blue  vertical Anchor line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Green   Blue  straight anchor lines will move the whole segment along the direction of the line

FineAdjustSplineSegmentRotate S20.png
Segment rotated anti-clockwise around the  Blue  rotational Anchor arc line
FineAdjustSplineSegmentPitch S20.png
Segment rotated clockwise around the  Red  rotational Anchor arc line
NotePad.PNG

 Red   Blue  curved anchor lines will rotate the whole segment around the axis of the same colour


PencilTips.PNG
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  line height change and a  Red  Anchor rotation can be cancelled at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Settle on Ground  option from the segments Context Menu
DotPoint.JPG a  Blue  Anchor rotation can be straightened at any time (even after saving and reloading the route) by selecting the  Straighten Spline  option from the segments Context Menu but this will not return the endpoints to their original positions


 Fine Adjustment: Set Spline Height 

PencilTips.PNG You can copy the height of a segment or endpoint into the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting by choosing one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment. If the segment has a slope then the height at the point clicked will be copied into the  Height  setting and the gradient will be copied into the  Grade  setting, OR
Bblue.png select the spline segment or endpoint and Right Click in the  Height  setting box. Select the  Get Height from Selection  option. If the spline segment has a slope then the height at its midpoint will be used


To set the height of a selected spline (including track) or endpoint, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click and Drag Up/Down on the objects  Blue  vertical Anchor line. Movement is restricted to the length of the Anchor line only, OR
Bblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value) and press the  Enter  key, OR
Cblue.png enter a new value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting (or keep the existing value), then Right Click in the setting box and select the  Set Height to Selection  option, OR
Dblue.png from the objects Context Menu (Left Click on the objects Context Icon or press the  T  key) the  Apply Height  option, OR
Eblue.png in the Info Palette enter a value in the objects  z  (height) setting or Left Click and Drag Up or Down on the double arrowheads to its right. This can be used to set the height to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


 Fine Adjustment: Spline Object Context Menu 

A selected scenery spline object, or a group of selected scenery spline objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click the Context Icon SplineContextIcons S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key
NotePad.PNG Notes:
Splines have two different Context Icons that lead to two slightly different Context Menus.
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for each endpoint
DotPoint.JPG one context icon and menu for the segment
If multiple segments have been selected then the last segment added to the selection will have the context icons. If all the segments were selected by a Double Left Click then the segment that was clicked will have the icons.


SplineEndPointContextIcon S20.png  Endpoint Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineObject S20.png
SplineSegmentContextIcon S20.pngTrackSegmentContextIcon S20.png  Segment Context Menu 
ContextMenuSplineSegment S20.png


 Cut  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Copy  remove the segment or segments and move them into the Scrapbook (not available for Endpoints)
 Paste  paste the contents of the current Scrapbook at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  delete the segment, segments or endpoint. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Replace Spline with Selected Asset  the highlighted spline will be replaced with the asset currently selected in the Assets Palette. If the asset selected in the Assets Palette is the wrong type (e.g. a mesh object instead of a scenery spline) then this option will be greyed out
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the segment or segments to match the set height of the spline (does not work on endpoints)
 Settle on Ground  sets the height of the selected endpoint to match the height of the terrain beneath them ("drops them back to earth"). When used on segments the spline will follow the height changes of the terrain
 Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the selected endpoint to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Height  sets the height of the selected segment or segments to the value in the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
 Apply Grade to this Spline Endpoint  sets the height of the endpoint to give a Grade to the surrounding segments that matches the value in the Tool Options Palette  Grade  setting
PencilTips.PNGYou can copy the Grade from an existing spline segment into the  Grade  setting of the Tool Options Palette.
DotPoint.JPG hold down the  Alt  key and Left Click on the spline segment to copy its Grade value. That value can then be used to set the Grade of other spline segments
 Straighten Spline  forces a straight line (as far as possible) between the endpoints of a single segment. This option will be Tick.PNG ticked if the segment has already been straightened in which case selecting this option will "un-straighten" the segment and remove the tick
 Separate Splines  breaks two spline segments into two separate (independent) splines at the selected endpoint
 Merge Splines  removes the selected endpoint and merges the segments on both sides into one. Two segments can also be joined by selecting and deleting the endpoint with the  Delete  key
 Insert Spline Point Here  inserts a new endpoint in a segment at the point where it was clicked. This will create a new segment at the endpoint
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected spline


Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png Rolling Stock Objects (locomotives, wagons, etc) can only be moved along the track that they are attached to. If they are moved off the track then they will immediately "snap back" to the nearest track when they are released.

 Fine Adjustment: Move Rolling Stock Objects 

Use the Fine Adjustment tool to move a selected rolling stock object along the track.

PencilTips.PNGTo move an entire consist of rolling stock objects, Double Left Click on any one of the objects in the consist to select them all and then move them as one object


FineAdjustRollingStock S20.png
link- Despite their presence in the Fine Adjustment Tool 3D Anchor Frame the  Red   Green   Blue  Rotational Anchor lines and the  Blue  Vertical Anchor Line will NOT work on Rolling Stock Objects
link- The Object Anchor (the central dot) will move the selected rolling stock object or objects in any horizontal direction but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline
link- The  Green  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects along the track
link- The  Red  Horizontal Anchor Line will move the selected rolling stock object or objects horizontally off the track but they will always be attached to the nearest track spline


NotePad.PNG Notes:

It is possible to place a rolling stock object so that it "overlaps" (occupies the same space as) another rolling stock object. A large yellow X rotating above the rolling stock object is a sign of this "conflict".

  PlacementRollingStockCollision S20.png This can happen if a rolling stock object is moved off the track and released. It will instantly snap to the nearest track position even if that position is already occupied.


The simple solution is to use the Fine Adjustment Tool to move the incorrectly placed object to an unoccupied section of the track.


 Fine Adjustment: Decouple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All decoupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects are performed using just a Left Click and Drag.


PencilTips.PNGTo decouple a string of joined rolling stock objects from a consist (for example, the first or last 5 wagons),  Shift  + Left Click on each of the objects to be selected and then drag them away from the consist


A rolling stock object or objects in the middle of a consist can also be decoupled. This will break the consist into 3 sections.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple5A S20.png

Steps: To decouple rolling stock from a consist:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select one (Left Click) or more ( Shift  + Left Click) rolling stock objects inside a consist
If more than one object is selected, then they:-
DotPoint.JPG do not have to be connected to each other
DotPoint.JPG should be in the same consist - the results may be "unexpected" if the objects are selected and dragged out from different consists


DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object or objects out of the consist and onto an Unoccupied section of track
DotPoint.JPG do not release the mouse button until you have the rolling stock objects in position otherwise they will simply "snap back" to the nearest track, regardless of whether it is already occupied or not. Think of the yellow connecting line between the wagon and the track shown in the image as if it is a "stretched rubber band"
DotPoint.JPG The rotating yellow X floating above the selected and now disconnected consist in the image indicates that it has been "derailed" from the track. This will disappear when it is "rerailled" again


 Fine Adjustment: Couple Rolling Stock Objects 

BlueDot10x10.png All coupling operations between Rolling Stock Objects can be performed using just a Left Click and Drag or through the objects Context Menu.

Options:

Ablue.png Using "Click and Drag"

Consider the following simple situation:-

The guard van (caboose) standing at the rear of a consist has to be coupled to the rear gondola wagon.
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple1 S20.png

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple2 S20.png
Steps: To Couple rolling stock objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select (Left Click) the rolling stock object (in this case the guard van) to be coupled to a consist or another rolling stock object (in this case the gondola)
DotPoint.JPG If more than one object has to be selected then use a  Shift  + Left Click to individually select each object
DotPoint.JPG If ALL the objects in a consist have to be selected then use a Double Left Click on any object in the consist
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag the object (the guard van) along the track to its target object or consist. When dragged rolling stock objects will "drop" or lower their height a few cms
DotPoint.JPG If the selected object (or objects) is already part of a consist then dragging will decouple it from the consist before moving it
DotPoint.JPG When it reaches the target object and couples it cannot be moved any further
DotPoint3.JPG Release the object when it has coupled and it will return to its correct height


Bblue.png Using the Context Menu

Using the same situation as above, the isolated guard van and the gondola wagon at the end of a consist are to be coupled together.

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3 S20.png
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Select,  Shift  + Left Click, on both objects
PencilTips.PNGThe order of selection IS important. Select the "destination" object, where the others will be coupled, last

The Context Icon will appear on the last rolling stock object selected.

DotPoint2.JPG Open the Rolling Stock Object Context Menu by choosing one of the following:-

Options:
Ablue.png Left Click on the Context Icon of the last selected rolling stock object, OR
Bblue.png press the  T  key

DotPoint3.JPG Select the option  Merge into Single Train 


There are two possible outcomes depending on which object has the Context Icon

DotPoint1Blue.png Context Icon on the Gondola Wagon

FreeMoveRollingStockCouple3A S20.png
Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the gondola wagon at the end of the consist. The guard van couples to the gondola wagon and the consist

DotPoint2Blue.png Context Icon on the Guard Van
FreeMoveRollingStockCouple4A S20.png

Using the Merge into a Single Train option with the Context Icon on the guard van. The gondola wagon decouples from the consist and couples to the guard van


Using a more complex example involving multiple objects from several different consists. The selected wagons shown below are to form a single consist based on the loco.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge1 S20.png
The loco was the last object to be selected so it has the Context Icon. The Context Menu is opened and the option  Merge into Single Train  is selected with the result as shown below.
FreeMoveRollingStockMultiMerge2 S20.png
The wagons and loco have been combined into a single consist but not necessarily in a useful order. Left Click and Drag the incorrectly placed vehicles to their correct positions.


 Fine Adjustment: Rolling Stock Object Context Menu 

A selected rolling stock object, or a group of selected rolling stock objects, will have a Context Icon that opens a Context Menu. The icon design will vary between object types.

To open a selected rolling stock objects Context menu choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png Left Click its Context Icon ContextIconsRollingStock S20.png OR
Bblue.png Press the  T  key


ContextMenuRollingStock S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Unlike other Context Menus, the  Cut  and  Copy  menu options are not selectable for Rolling Stock Objects because these objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The  Save to Consist Asset...  option performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock.
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted at the cursor (focus) point
 Delete  the selected rolling stock objects will be deleted. It has the same effect as pressing the  Delete  key
 Paint Under Selected  the texture selected in the Assets Palette will be painted under the selected objects. The Tool Options Palette brush settings ( Radius  and  Sensitivity ) will control how the texture is applied. If no ground texture has been selected in the Assets Palette then this option will be greyed out.
 Smooth Ground Under Selected  changes the height of the terrain under the rolling stock object to match its set height
 Reattach to Track  this option is only selecteable if a rolling stock object has derailed
 Rotate Vehicle  rotates (reverses) the facing direction of a selected rolling stock object. If more than one object has been selected then they will all have their directions reversed but they will remain in the same order
 Change Consist Heading  reverses the consist heading as indicated by the directions of the red and green arrows above the start and end of the consist
 Rotate Consist Heading  the entire consist is reversed, both in the order of the vehicles and the direction they face
 Merge into Single Train  when two or more separate rolling stock assets have been selected they will be coupled into a single consist. See PageLink.PNG Coupling Rolling Stock Objects for more details
 Save to Consist Asset...  saves the selected rolling stock objects as a new consist asset in the Assets Palette
 Select in Assets Palette  highlights the selected rolling stock object in the Assets Palette
 Edit Properties  opens the Properties window of the selected rolling stock object


Fine Adjustment: Object Height Problem Solutions

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
Two Anchor Points on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line determine the height of an endpoint or an object above the ground.
BlueDot10x10.png the height of a Rolling Stock Object (locomotive, wagon, etc) CANNOT be altered
BlueDot10x10.png the Object Height Anchor, which is normally Black but turns Green when it is selected, controls the height of the object (including spline Endpoints) above the ground. This Anchor point can be moved vertically by the tool pointer
BlueDot10x10.png the Ground Height Anchor, which is Yellow, marks the position of the object on the ground. This Anchor point cannot be moved vertically by the tool pointer but its height can be changed by setting the Tool Options Palette  Height  value
It is common for both height anchors to be at the same height but there are many situation where the two will be at different heights. The examples below show situations where the two are at different heights and the height of the Object Height Anchor will need to be adjusted.


FineAdjustSplineHeightUp.png  Object Height Above Ground Height 


Steps: To bring the object height down to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag downwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor down to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor


PencilTips.PNGTo achieve finer and more accurate control when moving the height Anchor point, choose one of the following:-
Options:
Ablue.png zoom in closer to the Anchor point, OR
Bblue.png use the  z  fine adjustment arrows in the Info Palette object Pos controls. This can be used to set the height and position to cm accuracy (see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette below).


FineAdjustSplineHeightDown.png  Object Height Below Ground Height 


Steps: To bring the object height up to the ground height:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag upwards on the  Blue  vertical Anchor line to bring the Object Height Anchor up to the same level as the Ground Height Anchor

FineAdjustSplineHeightOK.png


link Where this method fails is when the height difference between the two Anchor points exceeds the length of the  Blue  vertical Anchor line so the Ground Height Anchor or the Object Height Anchor is at the very top of the Anchor line. Once it is in that position the Object Height Anchor can no longer be moved up or down because there is no vertical Anchor line to grab.



PencilTips.PNGThe Quick Solution to this problem is to:-
DotPoint1.JPG open the object or endpont Context Menu
DotPoint2.JPG select the option  Settle on Ground . For splines this option will force the spline segment to follow the contours of the ground but it will now be at the same height as the ground


A more complex alternative method is to use the Surveyor Compass Rose, the Info Palette and the Tool Options Palette.

FineAdjustSplineSetFocus.png
The Surveyor Compass Rose
Steps:
DotPoint1.JPG Right Click on the terrain at a point which has the height that will be used by the object. This will position the Surveyor Compass Rose and record its data as the Focus
DotPoint2.JPG Open the Focus controls in the Info Palette by a Left Click on the small Right Arrowhead to the left of the Focus label
InfoPaletteFocusUseHeight.png The Info Palette stores the positional data, including the Height (the  z  value), of the Compass Rose under the label Focus
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the white Down Arrowhead next to the  z  value and select the menu option  Use Height for Brush . This will transfer the Focus  z  value to the Tool Options Palette  Height  setting
DotPoint4.JPG Open the Context Menu for the object (or spline endpoint)
DotPoint5.JPG Select the option  Apply Height  or  Apply Height to this Spline Endpoint 


The Marquee Tool

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
S20 MarqueeToolIcon.png Keyboard Shortcut:  F  The  Marquee Tool  selects and copies objects, deletes baseboards, adds new baseboards and sets their properties, adds texture to baseboards in a Trainz World


Some features of this tool use the Scrapbook Palette, Assets Palette and Tool Options Palette. If these palettes are not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document.


The Marquee Tool has no drop down menu lists.

MarqueeTools S20.png
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee Tool draws out a rectangular area, the Marquee Selection Area, on the route. Any objects (including Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers) that are inside the Marquee Selection Area or touched by its boundary will be selected.


PencilTips.PNGYou can use the Asset Palette filters to restrict the objects that will be selected in the Marquee Selection Area


MarqueeSelectArea S20.png

In the image above:-
DotPoint.JPG a road spline at the bottom and a house at the lower left of the Marquee Selection Area have been overlain by the drawn rectangle so they have been included in the selection.
DotPoint.JPG the Marquee Selection Area was drawn from the top left to the bottom right which places the Marquee Context Icon at the bottom right of the rectangle.
DotPoint.JPG the bottom right of the Marquee Selection Area also has a 3D Anchor Frame.
DotPoint.JPG The road spline was the last object that was included in the selection area so its Context Icons are also present.


Not shown in the image, because they are not highlighted, are the Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers that are also included in the Marquee Selection Area.

MarqueeAreaTools S20.png The Marquee Selection Area 3D Anchor Frame has some similarities to the one used with the Fine Adjustment Tool.
DotPoint.JPG the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors will move the Marquee and all its contents in the Anchor direction
DotPoint.JPG the  Blue  rotational Anchor will rotate the Marquee with all its contents in the direction of the rotation movement
DotPoint.JPG there are no  Green  and  Red  rotational Anchors
DotPoint.JPG at the centre of the 3D Anchor Frame is a Select Area Anchor. Left Click and Drag this Anchor point to move the Marquee with all its contents in any horizontal direction
DotPoint.JPG each of the  Green  and  Red  horizontal Anchors has a resize Anchor, an orange coloured dot, located at its end. Left Click and Drag these Anchor points to resize the Marquee Selection Area (and its contents) in that specific direction


Steps: To Create a Marquee Selection Area:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Marquee Tool (or press the  F  key)
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag out the Marquee Selection Area around the objects to be selected


The Marquee Tool and the Assets Palette Filter

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Assets Palette filter tools can be used to restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool.
AssetsPaletteFilterSelection S20.png
Steps: To restrict the objects selected by the Marquee Tool:-
DotPoint1.JPG set the Filter Type in the Assets Palette to  Filter Selection 
DotPoint2.JPG set the other filter options in the Assets Palette to narrow down the type of objects (e.g.  Scenery Splines  and/or enter a partial name in the Text Box)
DotPoint3.JPG select the Marquee Tool from the Tools Palette (or press the  F  key)
DotPoint4.JPG Left Click and Drag out the Marquee Selection Area around the objects to be selected
Only those objects identified in the Assets Palette filters will be selected by the Marquee


Using the Filters shown above, the Marquee Selection Area only selects scenery spline objects.

MarqueeSelectSplines S20.png

Marquee Anchor Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

The following images demonstrate the effect of using the Marquee Anchor Controls on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.

 Horizontal Anchor Shift 

  The  Green  horizontal Anchor has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaShift S20.png
 


 Rotational Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  rotational Anchor has been used to rotate the Marquee Selection Area about 45° anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the Marquee Selection Area has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaRotate S20.png
 


 Vertical Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  vertical Anchor has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaUplift S20.png
 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Marquee Anchors will move:-
DotPoint.JPG the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place
DotPoint.JPG the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing
DotPoint.JPG the effect layers
DotPoint.JPG the ground heights


Marquee Anchor Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

The following images demonstrate the effect of using the Marquee Anchor Controls on the image shown at the top of this section as the starting point.

 Horizontal Anchor Shift 

  The  Green  Horizontal Anchor has been used to shift the Marquee Selection Area to the left. Note that the 3 trees and a small building that were on the left of the Marquee Selection Area in the image above have been replaced (overwritten) by the Marquee contents. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaShift S20.png
 


 Rotational Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Rotational Anchor has been used to rotate the Marquee Selection Area about 45° anti-clockwise. Again, anything that was originally in the area now covered by the Marquee Selection Area has been replaced by the contents of the Marquee. Also note that the texture has been moved leaving a gap showing the original grid texture.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaRotate S20.png
 


 Vertical Anchor Shift 

  The  Blue  Vertical Anchor has been used to lift the Marquee Selection Area upwards.  
  MarqueeSelectAreaUplift S20.png
 


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The Marquee Anchors will move:-
DotPoint.JPG the selected scenery objects. If the objects are in locked layers then they will be copied before being moved and the original objects will remain in place
DotPoint.JPG the ground textures. As shown in two of the images this will leave the original baseboard ground texture showing
DotPoint.JPG the effect layers
DotPoint.JPG the ground heights


Scrapbook Operations

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when created, will contain:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers - if present
DotPoint.JPG Selected Objects - scenery items, splines, track, signals, etc
 But NOT Rolling Stock (Trains) 
Ground heights, textures and effect layers are always included in a scrapbook but you can control which visible objects are added by manually selecting them.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

Scrapbooks, when painted or pasted, can contain any combinations of:-
DotPoint.JPG Ground Heights
DotPoint.JPG Ground Textures
DotPoint.JPG Effect Layers
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Objects (Meshes) - individual buildings, trees, signals, etc
DotPoint.JPG Scenery Splines - roads, track, fences, etc
You have options in the Scrapbook Filters that will control which of these data categories are transferred and how they are transferred from the scrapbook into a route.


Once an area has been marked out by the Marquee Tool a number of options become available.

MarqueeEditMenu S20.png
The SurveyorEditIcon.png Surveyor Edit Menu will show some additional options specifically for the Marquee Tool:-
 Cut  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including the ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. Any scenery objects (excluding ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) that are not in a locked layer will be removed from the Marquee area. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  X  keys
 Copy  the objects selected in the Marquee area (including ground heights, ground textures and effect layers) will be copied and placed into a new Scrapbook. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  C  keys
 Paste  the contents of the current Scrapbook will be pasted into the route at the cursor (focus) point. Which contents will be pasted and how they will be pasted are controlled by the Filters in the Scrapbook Palette (see PageLink.PNG Scrapbook Data for more details). This option will always be available with and without a Marquee area being marked if there is a scrapbook available to be pasted. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  V  keys
 Clear  the selected scenery objects that are not in locked layers will be removed from the Marquee area but NOT the selected ground heights, ground textures and effect layers. This is the same as pressing the  Delete  key
 Select None  the Marquee Selection Area boundary lines are removed from the route cancelling the selection process. Nothing that is inside the area will be removed. This is the same as pressing the  Ctrl  +  D  keys


 Adding a New Scrapbook 

BlueDot10x10.png The  Cut  and  Copy  Scrapbook operations are also found in the Marquee Context Menu (see the Marquee Context Menu section above).


PencilTips.PNGYou don't have to use the Marquee Tool to create a new Scrapbook. You can use the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool to select any number of objects and then press  Ctrl  +  C . The selected objects, along with the ground height, ground textures, and any effect layers, will be copied into a new Scrapbook


When a new Scrapbook is created by a  Cut  or  Copy , it will appear in the Scrapbook palette with some basic details.

ScrapbookNew S20.png
The newly created scrapbook will be given:-
DotPoint.JPG a name consisting of the date and time of its creation
DotPoint.JPG a thumbnail
PencilTips.PNGThe thumbnail image will be taken using the current camera POV (point of view). To get a better image adjust the camera position and view to give the best possible shot of the Scrapbook objects before giving the  Cut  or  Copy  command
DotPoint.JPG a scrapbook number (it will be inserted as №1 scrapbook)
DotPoint.JPG an expiry date which will be set 5 days after its creation - this will countdown each day until 0 when the new scrapbook will be deleted


NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Scrapbooks use very little memory so there is no real limit to how many you can store in the palette but finding the one you want will be more difficult as the list grows longer
DotPoint.JPG Rolling Stock Objects cannot be added to a Scrapbook. The rolling stock Context Menu option  Save to Consist Asset...  performs some of the Scrapbook functions for rolling stock objects and consists


PencilTips.PNG Deleting a Scrapbook after it has been pasted does not delete the objects that it has added to the route


There are two changes that can be made to the new scrapbook:-
DotPoint.JPG Give it a name - Left Click inside the Name Text Box and type a new name. To set its new name Left Click on the image (pressing the  Enter  key does not work - a known bug)
DotPoint.JPG Make it permanent - Left Click the white Pin icon (ScrapbookUnPinnedIcon S20.png) to change it to blue. The scrapbook will no longer expire but it can still be deleted at any time
Pinned scrapbooks are always shown with a blue pin icon ScrapbookPinnedIcon S20.png and the words "pinned, no expiry" displayed next to their scrapbook №
PencilTips.PNGThe Pinning of any scrapbook can be reversed so that it will then expire in 5 days time. Left Click the blue pin icon.
ScrapbookNewNamedPinned S20.png


Once a scrapbook has been Pinned it becomes an asset and will appear in Content Manager

ScrapbookEntryCM S20.png

The scrapbook can be uploaded to the DLS and saved as a CDP file.

PencilTips.PNGYou can archive your scrapbooks as CDP files to keep the number of installed scrapbooks to a minimum. If an archived scrapbook is needed then you can use the Import Content Files option in Content Manager to add it to the Scrapbook Palette. It can be deleted from the palette later, when no longer needed.


Managing Baseboards

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Marquee is a powerful tool for adding, deleting and changing the properties of multiple baseboards


Marquee drawn area
Steps: To add new baseboards:-
DotPoint1.JPG select the Marquee Tool (or press the  F  key).
DotPoint2.JPG Left Click and Drag to draw out an area where the new baseboards will be added. This area can include the current baseboard.
The Marquee Selection Area, shown with a green border in the image on the left, covers the existing baseboard (black, bottom left) and where 3 new baseboards will be created. The Marquee has a Context Icon as shown in the image.
DotPoint3.JPG Left Click on the Context Icon or press the  T  key to open up the Marquee Context Menu (see Marquee Context Menu above).
DotPoint4.JPG Create, Convert, Delete
DotPoint.JPG To Create new baseboards, and to Convert selected baseboards to a different Grid Resolution, select the Context Menu option  Convert Baseboards To >  then select a resolution from two sub-options,  5m Grid  and  10m Grid . If existing baseboards have been selected then they will also be converted to the new resolution.
DotPoint.JPG To Delete baseboards select the Context Menu option  Delete Baseboards in Marquee . The  Ctrl  +  Z  keys can Undo the deletion.
DotPoint.JPG To set the selected baseboards to the  Height  value in the Tool Options Palette select the Context Menu option  Set Marquee to Brush Height . If the Marquee extends over "empty space" then new baseboards will be created at the set  Height  value.


Mass Object Moves and Clones

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up Next Down Bottom
PencilTips.PNGBoth the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool can move and clone (copy) single and multiple objects. The Marquee Tool can also move and clone objects but it will include the Ground Surface Height, Ground Textures and any Effect Layers in the cloning and moving operations.

Selecting and Moving Multiple Objects

Multiple objects can be selected and moved with the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool.

NotePad.PNG Notes: Mass Moves

The objects do not have to be:-
DotPoint.JPG the same type. They can be a mixture of scenery splines and mesh objects
DotPoint.JPG in the same layers but objects in Locked layers cannot be moved
PencilTips.PNGYou can also use the Marquee Tool to move objects but this will move Ground Heights, Ground Textures and Effect Layers as well as objects.


MultipleSelectionGroup S20.png
Steps: To select multiple objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Select the Free Move Tool or Fine Adjustment Tool
DotPoint2.JPG  Shift  + Left Click on every object that is to be included in the selection group


PencilTips.PNGYou can apply the  Height  setting in the Tool Options Palette to the entire group of selected objects.
MultipleSelectionGroupMove S20.png
Steps: To move multiple objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click and Drag the selected objects in the required direction
DotPoint2.JPG Release the mouse button when the group of objects are in position


PencilTips.PNGThe Fine Adjustment Tool  Blue  Rotation Anchor can be used to rotate all the members of the group with the last selected object (the one with the Context Icon) as the centre of rotation


 Selecting Multiple Identical Objects 

You can quickly select all nearby identical objects by a Double Left Click on an object.

PencilTips.PNGThis also applies to all the wagons in a consist. Double Left Click on any one of them to select all of them - they do not have to be identical wagons.


A forest of many different trees. Only one has been selected. Double Left Click on a tree to select all the identical trees in the forest.
MultipleSelectTip1 S20.png MultipleSelectTip2 S20.png


PencilTips.PNG Shift  + Double Left Click on another object. It and all its identical copies will be added to the selection.


Cloning Objects

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png You can easily clone single and multiple selected objects. If you have selected a group of objects they do not have to be the same type - you can select scenery objects and scenery splines.


Bug.png Known Issues:

Cloning does not work with Track Objects (signals, speed signs, switches, etc) but it does work with track spline and rolling stock objects. This has been reported as a bug.


NotePad.PNG Notes: Layers and Cloning

DotPoint.JPG the objects can be in different layers
DotPoint.JPG the layers can be locked and the objects will still be cloned
DotPoint.JPG all the cloned objects will be placed into the current Active Layer which must be Unlocked
For more information on layers see PageLink.PNG The Info Palette at the end of this document.


Steps: To clone an object or a group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG use either the Free Move Tool or the Fine Adjustment Tool to select the object or objects
DotPoint2.JPG  Ctrl  + Left Click and Drag on any of the selected objects
FreeMoveCloneSelect S20.png FreeMoveCloneMoved S20.png


The Info Palette

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png Top Next Up   Bottom
If the Info Palette is not visible on the screen then refer to PageLink.PNG Notes: Palettes at the top of this document. Some Info Palette functions will also require the Assets Palette and the Tool Options Palette.


S20 PaletteInfo.png
This palette can be easily overlooked but it has some very useful features:-
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the "focus" - the position of the cursor
BlueDot10x10.png providing precise data and control over the position and orientation of objects (it can be used instead of the Free Move Tool and the Fine Adjustment Tool)
BlueDot10x10.png identifying and setting the "home" layer and binding layer of a selected object
BlueDot10x10.png used for locking and unlocking a selected objects layer

The components of the Info Palette are identified in the image below.

InfoPalette S20.png Each of the small arrowhead icons will open the palette to display more information and some controls.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

All the positional data and controls in the Info Palette are defined in the following ways:-

 x  is ALWAYS the  North-South  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 y  is ALWAYS the  East-West  compass direction regardless of the direction that an object is facing
 z  is ALWAYS the  Vertical  direction (perpendicular to the compass directions) regardless of how an object has been rolled or tilted

DotPoint.JPG distances are measured in metres from the North-West corner of the first baseboard. If that baseboard is later deleted then distances will still be measured from its original and now "virtual" North-West corner.
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive distances are in the  South  and  East  directions
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative distances are in the  North  and  West  directions
DotPoint.JPG New boards added to the North of the first baseboard will have negative x coordinates and new boards added to the West of the first baseboard will have negative y coordinates.


Focus Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Focus shows the current position and height of the Cursor object.

Open up the Focus by a Left Click on its arrowhead icon.

PencilTips.PNGBefore changing the cursor position with the Focus controls, set a Bookmark at its current position.


InfoPaletteFocus S20.png


The current cursor position is shown in the x, y and z text boxes. These values can be edited to move the cursor to a new position but CARE will be needed.

PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x or y value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the cursor will be refocused at a point on the baseboard edge that is the closest to the entered co-ordinates.


PencilTips.PNGIf it has not been deleted you can identify the original (first) baseboard by entering 0 as the Focus  x  and  y  co-ordinates


Next to the z co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteFocusMenu S20.png There is only one option in the sub-menu.  Use Height for Brush 
Left Click on the option to copy the current cursor height (z) value from the Info Palette to the Tool Options Palette  Height  entry.


Asset Name Menu

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for a name to be shown and for this menu to be available.

InfoPaletteMulti S20.png If more than one object has been selected then the name and position data shown will be for the last selected object. If different objects (with different kuid codes) have been selected then a count of the additional objects will be added. The (+2) shown in the object name in the image on the left indicates that 2 additional different objects are in the group of selected objects.


Next to the objects name is a small white Down Arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPaletteMenu S20.png The menu options are:-
 Copy   NOT WORKING  (a known bug) - copies the objects text details into the OS Clipboard for pasting, for example, into a text editor
 Show Asset Details  opens a new window showing the image and description of the selected object
 List Assets in New Window  opens up Content Manager and lists all the selected objects
 Add to Picklist  adds selected objects to a Picklist
 Remove from Picklist  removes selected objects from a Picklist (objects must already be in a Picklist)
 Select in Assets Palette  selects and highlights the selected object in the Assets Palette


Position Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the position data to be shown and edited. Open up the position data by a Left Click on its Pos: arrowhead icon.

InfoPalettePos S20.png The position of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the x, y and z text boxes. These values can be edited to move the object or objects to a new position but CARE will be needed.


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each data entry box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the position in smaller increments down to centimetres


NotePad.PNG Notes:

If you enter an x or y value that is "out in empty space" (beyond the edge of a boundary baseboard) then the objects will be moved to that position and may vanish from view. The Undo command can be used to reverse the move or the Marquee Tool can be used to add a baseboard under the "floating" objects.


Next to the z co-ordinate is a small white down arrowhead. Left Click on the arrowhead to open its menu.

InfoPalettePosMenu S20.png There is only one option in the sub-menu.  Use Height for Brush 
Left Click on the option to copy the current cursor height (z) value from the Info Palette to the Tool Options Palette  Height  entry.


Rotation Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the rotation data to be shown and edited. Open up the rotation data by a Left Click on its Rot: arrowhead icon.

InfoPaletteRot S20.png The rotational orientation of the selected object (or the last object if more than one is selected) is shown in the r, p and y text boxes (the letters stand for Roll, Pitch and Yaw). These values can be edited to rotate the object or objects in 3D space BUT not all objects can be rotated in certain directions.
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG If several objects have been selected then the last selected object, the one with the Context Icon, will be the centre of all rotations.
DotPoint.JPG Not all objects will allow rotations. For example, SpeedTree objects can only be rotated using the  y  value ( r  and  p  entries will be ignored) while Spline objects cannot be rotated at all


PencilTips.PNGOn the right of each box is a pair of Up/Down arrow controls. Left Click and Drag up or down on these to adjust the rotation angle in increments of 1°.


NotePad.PNG Notes:

The rotation data and controls are defined in the following ways:-

 r  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis (which was defined when it was created).
This is the same as the  Red  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 p  ALWAYS rotates in the vertical plane around the selected objects Y axis PLUS 90°.
This is the same as the  Green  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool
 y  ALWAYS rotates in the horizontal plane around the compass Z or Vertical axis regardless of how the object has been rolled or pitched.

This is similar to but NOT exactly the same as the  Blue  Rotational Anchor in the Fine Adjustment Tool

 Rot:   y  = East 90° North 180° West 270° South
Original
RotationAxis S20.png
Roll:  r = 45 
RotationAxisRoll S20.png
Pitch:  p = 45 
RotationAxisPitch S20.png
Yaw:  y = 45 
RotationAxisYaw S20.png
 

DotPoint.JPG Some objects will NOT allow Roll or Pitch rotations
DotPoint.JPG all angles are measured in degrees
DotPoint.JPG  +  positive angles are anticlockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG  -  negative angles are clockwise when viewed facing the rotation axis direction
DotPoint.JPG angles greater than 360° can be entered but will give the same result as the angle minus 360°. For example: 450° is exactly the same angle as 90° (450°-360°=90°)
DotPoint.JPG clockwise and anti-clockwise angles are complementary. For example: entering -270° (clockwise) will give the same angle as entering +90° (anticlockwise)


Layer Info and Controls

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

You must have an object (or objects) selected for the layer data to be shown and edited. Open up the layer data by a Left Click on its Layer: arrowhead icon.

NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG the Info Palette is best used to show and edit the layer and binding layer assignments of individual selected objects
DotPoint.JPG operations such as creating, deleting, merging, renaming, moving and hiding layers are performed using the Layers Palette
DotPoint.JPG layers can be Locked and Unlocked using the Info Palette or the Layers Palette but the Layers Palette is often the better choice for these tasks


InfoPaletteLayer S20.png This will show the:-
DotPoint.JPG current layer assigned to the selected object
DotPoint.JPG its assigned Binding Layer (if any)
DotPoint.JPG the Locked or Unlocked state of the assigned layer
  InfoPaletteLockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Unlocked. Click this button to Lock the layer
  InfoPaletteUnlockedLayerBtn S20.png Layer is currently Locked. Click this button to Unlock the layer
  Using this button will also change the Locked or Unlocked padlock icon shown next to the layer name in the Layers Palette
AssetsPaletteLockedUnlockedLayers S20.png
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Locked Layer cannot be deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG Locked Layers can be deleted, moved and merged with other layers


InfoPaletteLayersMulti S20.png If multiple objects from different layers have been selected then no layer name will be shown in the Layer and Binding boxes. Instead they will be left "blank" as shown in the image on the left.

Both boxes can still be opened to assign layers to objects.

Stop.PNG WARNING:
DotPoint.JPG Setting a layer for multiple objects that are in different layers will move ALL those objects to that layer
DotPoint.JPG If objects are moved from one layer group to another (such as from the Route Layers to the Session Layers) then it will change where those objects are saved (in the Route or in the Session)


Assigning Objects to a Different Layer

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        

A selected object or group of selected objects can be assigned to a different layer. If multiple objects have been selected then they do not have to all be in the same layer.

InfoPaletteLayerDropBoxList S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the Layer drop down box. The layer containing the object (for a single selected object only) will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the destination layer name from the drop down list. See Warning above
The layer reassignment will start the instant the destination layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


Once a target layer has been selected then the  Select Layer  button, which sets the Active Layer, may become active.

BlueDot10x10.png The Active Layer is the layer used by the Placement Tool when objects are added to a route (or session). This button gives you the opportunity to set the Active Layer to the same layer that you just used to assign to an object. Its use is optional.


PencilTips.PNGYou can also set the Active Layer by selecting its name from the list in the Layers Palette.


Options: To set current layer to the Active Layer:-
Ablue.png If the  Select Layer  button is greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOff S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to the current Active Layer so there is no need to use this option
Bblue.png If it is NOT greyed out
InfoPaletteLayerSelectBtnOn S20.png then the selected object is now assigned to a layer that is not the current Active Layer. Left Click on the  Select Layer  button to switch the Active Layer to the same layer as the object


Assigning Objects to a Binding Layer

SkipDown.png SkipUp.png        
BlueDot10x10.png The Binding Layer, or Bound Layer as it is also called, is a tool used in the development of a route or session. It allows you to temporarily assign an object to a second layer while it is still in its original layer. The object will then take on the properties (Locked or Unlocked, Hidden or Visible) of both layers.
Assigned
Layer
Binding
Layer
Object
Status
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked
LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png or LayerUnLocked S20.png or None LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerUnLocked S20.png Unlocked LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED LayerLocked S20.png LOCKED
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeOpen S20.png or None LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible
LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeOpen S20.png or LayerEyeClosed S20.png or None LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
LayerEyeOpen S20.png Visible LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN LayerEyeClosed S20.png HIDDEN
In Summary:-
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Locked then the object will be Locked
DotPoint.JPG If the Assigned Layer or the Binding Layer of an object is Hidden then the object will be Hidden
NotePad.PNG Notes:

DotPoint.JPG Objects in a Hidden Layer cannot be seen and therefore, cannot be selected, deleted or moved
DotPoint.JPG The Layers Palette is the ONLY way to create, delete, name and hide layers


Some examples of using the Binding Layer:-
 Example 1: 
The problem: You need to stop an object from being selected so that you can you move other objects on or around it
The solution: Use the Layers Palette to create a new empty layer and lock it. Set the Binding Layer of the object to the new locked layer. The object will then be locked so it cannot be selected or moved even though its original layer is unlocked. When the edit has been completed delete the empty locked layer you just created to unlock all its bound objects and remove all their bindings
 Example 2: 
The problem: A group of objects (e.g trees) are blocking access to another object.
The solution: Use the Layers Palette to create a new empty layer and hide it. Set the Binding Layer of the blocking objects to the new hidden layer. The blocking objects will no longer be visible and cannot be selected even though their original layer is still visible. When the edit has been completed delete the empty hidden layer you just created to make all its bound objects visible and remove all their bindings


InfoPaletteBindingDropBox S20.png
Steps: To change the assigned binding layer of an object or group of objects:-
DotPoint1.JPG Left Click on the Binding drop down box. If the object is already bound to a layer (for a single selected object only) the binding layer will be shown with a BulletTick.png in front of its name
DotPoint2.JPG Select the Binding layer name from the drop down list. Note: the objects assigned layer will not appear in the list because an object cannot be bound to its own layer
The layer reassignment will start the instant the layer is selected
DotPoint3.JPG If you see a Debugging Window on the screen as the task is processed, it will inform you when the task has been completed. You can then close the window


As an example, the image below shows what you will see for a single object that has had:-
InfoPaletteLayerSetBindingSet S20.png
DotPoint.JPG its assigned layer changed (in the example from "route-layer" to "Station Buildings")
DotPoint.JPG its binding layer set (in the example to "Multi Industries")
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is not locked so you have the option to lock it
DotPoint.JPG the newly assigned layer is not the Active Layer so you have the option to make it the Active Layer


LinkWiki.PNG

More information on creating, editing and using Layers can be found on the Trainz Wiki at:-

How to Use Layers


  SkipUp.png Top Next Up    


Trainz Wiki

TrainzWiki.png

More Tutorials and Guides to Using Trainz


This page was created by Trainz user pware in January 2023 and was last updated as shown below.


Personal tools